Skip to main content

Full text of "Dreaming of a time : the School of Public Health : the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 1939-1989"

See other formats


Dreaming  Of  A  Time 


THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 

at 

CHAPEL  HILL 


Robert  Rodgers  Korstad 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 
State  Library  of  North  Carolina 


http://www.archive.org/details/dreamingoftimescOOkors 


N.C.  DOCUMENTS 
CLEARINGHOUSE 

JUN    13   1990 

N.C.  STATE  LIBRARY 
RALEIGH 


Dreaniins  Of  A  Time 


The  School  of  Public  Health 

THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 

at 

CHAPEL  HILL 
1939-1989 


Robert  Rodgers  Korstad 


Copyright  ©  1990  by  the  School  of  Public  Health,  The 
University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill.  All  rights 
reserved. 

Production  by  UNC  Printing  Department 

Design  by  Cranine  Brinkhous 

Library  of  Congress  Cataloging  in  Publication  Data 

Korstad,  Robert  Rodgers 

Dreaming  Of  A  Time;  The  School  of  Public  Health,  TTie 
University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  1939-1989 

ISBN  0-89055-324-6 

90-60829 
GIF 


HTable  of  Content^ 


HI 


Acknowledgmeiits v 

r  1 

PREPARING  THE  WAY 1 


Chapter  2 

THE  EARLY  YEARS  25 


Chapter  3 

DOCTORS  OF  THE  BODY  POLITIC 49 

Chapter  4 

FOR  SCIENCE  AND  SOCIETY 79 


CONFLICT  AND  CHANGE  109 


PRACTICE  WHAT  YOU  TEACH 141 

>gue 171 

Notes 181 


Photograph  Credits 


Bradford  Bachrach:  p.  95. 

Betty  Ficquett:  p.  41  (left). 

Hilton  Goulson:  p.  99. 

Dorothy  Mayes:  p.   134. 

North  Carolina  Collection,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 

pp.  14,  15,  20,  23  (bottom),  27,  34,  62. 

North  Carolina  Division  of  Archives  and  History:  pp.  5,  18,  24,  25,  30, 

38,  74. 

Daniel  Okun:  pp.  80,  81,  131. 

Rockefeller  Archive  Center:  pp.  8,  11,  16,  19. 

Eunice  Tyler:  39,  41  (right),  42,  43,  45,  46,  48  (top),  60. 

Bailey  Webb:  pp.  32,  35,  36. 

The  other  photographs  in  the  book  are  part  of  the  School  of  Public 

Health  Collection. 


IporeworlH) 


A  sense  of  enormous  excitement  and  satisfaction  prevails  as  we 
celebrate  the  50th  Anniversary  of  the  School  of  Public  Health 
and  dedicate  the  McGavran-Greenberg  Hall  and  the  Baity 
Laboratory.  At  this  critical  juncture  of  our  history,  we  need  to  pause 
and  reflect  on  our  origin,  mission,  and  achievements,  which  are  well 
documented  in  this  volume. 

The  expansion  of  the  school  facilities,  the  growth  of  the  faculty 
and  student  bodies,  the  quality  and  dedication  of  the  staff,  the  superb 
quality  of  the  research,  the  technical  assistance  and  continuing  education 
offered  to  professionals  in  North  Carolina,  and  the  commitment  of  the 
faculty  to  teaching  excellence  are  all  clear  achievements  of  which  we 
are  proud.  Of  equal  importance,  this  book  chronicles  the  many  contri- 
butions of  individual  faculty  and  staff,  living  and  dead,  who  have  had 
a  profound  effect  on  what  we  are  today.  It  is  most  gratifying  to  me  that 
we  have  the  opportunity  to  review  their  many  accomplishments  and  to 
acknowledge  our  debt  to  them. 

At  the  same  time,  it  is  appropriate  that  we  recognize  that  there 
have  been  disagreements  over  the  appropriate  mission  of  the  school,  and 
that  sincere  men  and  women  have  held  different,  sometimes  radically 
different,  views  of  what  our  school  should  be.  Some  of  these  differences 
have  been  resolved;  others  are  with  us  today.  So  must  it  be,  lest  we 
not  be  true  to  our  heritage,  or  to  the  spirit  of  inquiry  that  is  the 
primary  purpose  of  an  academic  institution. 

At  this  moment  in  the  evolution  of  the  school  it  is  appropriate  to 
reflect  on  the  lessons  of  our  history.  While  it  is  instructive,  indeed 
necessary,  for  us  to  understand  how  we  have  become  what  we  are,  we 
must  also  recognize  that  not  all  of  the  accommodations  to  past  realities 
are  appropriate  for  the  future,  lb  be  consistently  ranked  in  the  top 
echelon  of  schools  of  public  health  would  indicate  an  institution  of 
considerable  strength  and  vigor.  Organizations,  however,  cannot  be 
complacent  and  ignore  the  changing  realities  of  a  dynamic  society.  Our 
tradition  of  departmental  autonomy,  for  example,  presented  few  obstacles 


to  interdisciplinary  efforts  when  the  entire  faculty  could,  and  often  did, 
meet  around  one  conference  table.  While  maintaining  strong  depart- 
ments necessary  to  address  societal  problems  in  the  next  decades,  we 
must  discover  ways  to  enhance  cooperative  efforts,  which  our  current 
structure  sometimes  discourages.  While  continuing  to  support  a  strong 
research  orientation  in  our  faculty,  we  cannot  minimize  the  fundamental 
importance  of  encouraging  outstanding  teaching  and  service  programs. 
And  while  the  School  of  Public  Health  can  be  justly  proud  of  the 
leadership  we  have  shown  in  recruiting  women  and  minority  faculty, 
staff,  and  students,  we  still  have  a  long  way  to  go.  We  cannot  rest  on 
past  success  but  must  vigorously  pursue  a  goal  of  greater  representation 
by  women  and  minorities  in  all  areas  of  the  school. 

Robert  Korstad  has  shown  us  in  this  volume  where  we  have  been 
and  something  of  how  we  came  to  be  what  we  are.  I  am  proud  of  our 
accomplishments,  grateful  for  our  differences,  and  confident  that  the 
School  of  Public  Health  will  continue  to  make  progress  in  teaching, 
research,  and  service  programs.  Let  us  not  forget  that  this  is  a  profes- 
sional school  dedicated  to  the  maintenance  of  health  and  prevention  of 
disease.  Public  service  is  not  only  a  slogan  for  us;  it  is  our  mission.  We 
may  disagree  on  the  mechanisms,  on  strategies,  even  on  definitions  of 
health  and  disease.  Whatever  the  future  brings  us,  let  it  be  known  that 
we  will  always  care.  If  this  book  teaches  us  anything,  it  is  that  good 
people  did  care. 

Michel  A.  Ibrahim,  M.D. 
Dean 


A cknov 


7I 


rompiling  a  history  of  the  School  of  Public  Health  at  the 
University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill  in  the  short 
time  we  had  available  required  supportive  efforts  from 
many  people.  Dean  Michel  Ibrahim's  enthusiasm  made  the  whole 
thing  possible.  The  members  of  the  50th  Anniversary  Dedication 
committee  — Harriet  Barr,  Pam  Home,  Richard  House,  Robert 
Moorhead,  and  Linda  Parker— read  every  word  more  times  than 
they  would  have  liked,  but  always  had  helpful  suggestions.  Harriet 
Barr  shared  her  knowledge  and  love  of  the  school  and  the  many 
photographs  she  has  collected  over  the  years.  Mike  Martin, 
Frances  Weaver,  and  Marshall  Bullock  of  the  University  Archives 
led  me  through  the  extensive  records  of  the  school  and  provided 
me  with  much  useful  information  on  the  university.  The  Dean's 
Office  staff— Melinda  Walden,  Shirley  Clements,  Terri  Davis, 
Gail  Gibbs,  Delores  Gold,  Rosa  Laney,  Jennie  Maurer,  Mary 
McCurdy,  Barbara  Seago,  Sylvia  White,  and  Betty  Sue  Yow— 
helped  me  over  and  around  many  bureaucratic  hurdles  and 
helped  make  my  eighteen  months  at  the  school  particularly 
enjoyable.  Jean  Allen,  Donna  Cooper,  and  Nancy  Cant  showed 
me  the  ropes  at  the  Kron  building.  Gail  Gibbs  located  school 
records  in  remote  corners  of  Rosenau  Hall  and  took  care  of  many 
administrative  details.  Jennie  Maurer  transcribed  the  interviews 
and  navigated  the  minefields  of  word  processing  programs.  Her 
good  cheer  and  dependability  saw  me  through  some  anxious 
moments.  Linda  Waldrop  provided  good  advice  along  the  way, 
but  her  special  concern  in  the  final  stages  made  this  a  better 
book.  Bill  Herzog,  Bert  Kaplan,  Daniel  Okun,  and  Sharon 
Schramm  gave  the  manuscript  the  benefit  of  their  rich  knowl- 
edge of  the  school.  Jacquelyn  Dowd  Hall  and  James  Leloudis  of 
the  Department  of  History  read  many  drafts  and  DREAMING 
OF  A  TIME  benefitted  from  their  considerable  intellectual  and 
editorial  abilities.  Winston  Fitzpatrick  copy-edited  the  manuscript 
with  great  care  and  patience.  Debbie  Atkinson  proof-read  the 
final  copy  with  a  watchful  eye.  Cranine  Brinkhous's  design  cap- 
tured the  spirit  of  the  school,  and  her  remarkable  equanimity 
kept  us  on  course.  Finally,  Bob  Moorhead's  love  of  history  and 
his  commitment  to  the  School  of  Public  Health  made  this  book 
a  reality. 

Robert  Rodgers  Korstad 
Chapel  Hill,  January,  1990 


r^hapter  1 


PREPARING  THE  WAY 


Lj 


n  June  7,  1940,  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  University  of 
^    North  Carolina  officially  created  the  School  of  Public  Health 


at  Chapel  Hill.  That  act  represented  the  culmination  of  a 
twenty-year  attempt  to  build  a  permanent  educational  center  for  public 
health  professionals.  No  single  incident  marked  the  beginning  of  the 
school.  There  were  many  false  starts  and  small  beginnings.  But  a  sequence 
of  events  in  the  fall  of  1935  crystallized  those  efforts  and  did  more 
than  anything  else  to  give  direction  and  character  to  the  enterprise.  Dr. 
Carl  V.  Reynolds,  state  health  officer  from  1934  to  1948,  recalled: 

It  was  my  habit  to  read  the  [Raleigh]  hleivs  and  Observer  on  rising 
in  the  morning,  realizing  that  if  there  were  news  of  importance, 
with  its  eagle  eye  for  news,  that  paper  would  have  it.  It  was  that 
morning  of  all  mornings,  I  saw  an  announcement  of  Dr.  Milton  J. 
Rosenau's  retirement  from  Harvard  School  of  Medicine.  I  envisioned, 
if  we  could  secure  the  services  of  that  nationally  and  internationally 
known  man  of  many  parts  and  the  father  of  preventive  medicine, 
who  sought  to  give  a  healthier,  happier  and  more  abundant  life  to 
his  fellow  man,  it  would  be  the  fulfillment  of  a  fond  dream  come 
true.  Realizing  that  an  official  invitation  would  have  to  come  from 
the  University  of  North  Carolina,  I  hastened  without  notifying  my 
office,  to  Chapel  Hill  for  a  conference  with  the  dean  of  the  medical 
school  and  my  friend  Dr.  Charles  S.  Mangum.  After  [I  made]  my 
wishes  known,  Charles's  reply  was,  "Carl,  you  can't  get  Rosenau  to 
come  here."  My  answer  was  a  challenge,  "Hell's  Fire,  shoot  at  the 
moon  and  you  might  hit  it."  The  Dean  surrendered  and  said,  "Well, 
Carl  if  you  feel  that  strongly  about  it,  I  will  risk  a  three  cent  stamp 
on  him."' 

Dean  Mangum  promptly  wrote  to  Rosenau,  describing  the  uni- 
versity's plans  to  establish  a  public  health  training  program  and  the 


importance  of  finding  the  right  man  to  head  the  effort.  "It  occurred  to 
me,"  he  concluded,  "that  it  might  be  possible  that  you  could  be  interested 
in  coming  to  this  delightful  climate  and  spend  a  while  in  Chapel  Hill, 
in  the  foothills  of  the  famous  Piedmont  section  of  North  Carolina,  so 
near  Pinehurst,  where  we  have  flowers  in  bloom  and  play  tennis  and 
golf  the  year  round. "^ 

Unbeknownst  to  either  Reynolds  or  Mangum,  Rosenau  had  not 
retired  voluntarily.  Harvard  required  mandatory  retirement  at  age  sixty- 
five,  but  Rosenau  had  no  desire  to  leave  his  life's  work.  (He  later  confided 
to  a  colleague,  "You  can't  retire  a  man  who's  not  tired.")  Rosenau  imme- 
diately expressed  interest  in  the  position  and  set  in  motion  a  series  of 
exchanges  that  would  lead  to  his  appointment  as  director  of  the  Division 
of  Public  Health  in  the  School  of  Medicine.^ 

Milton  J.  Rosenau  was  at  the  time  one  of  the  premier  figures  in 
public  health  in  the  United  States,  and  his  presence  gave  the  division 
instant  national  exposure.  Born  in  Philadelphia  in  1869,  Rosenau  received 
his  M.D.  from  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  before  doing  postgraduate 
work  in  Germany.  He  joined  the  United  States  Public  Health  and 
Marine  Hospital  Service  in  1890,  directing  the  service's  hygienic  labora- 
tory (the  forerunner  of  the  National  Institutes  of  Health)  from  1899  to 
1909.  In  1909  Rosenau  took  a  newly  established  chair  in  preventive 
medicine  at  Harvard  Medical  School,  the  first  of  its  kind  in  the  United 
States,  which  he  held  until  his  retirement  in  1935.  There  he  helped 
establish  and  direct  the  first  university-based  public  health  training 
center,  the  Harvard-Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology  School  for 
Health  Officers. 

Rosenau's  medical  and  research  interests  ranged  widely.  His  work 
at  the  hygienic  laboratory  included  standardization  of  diphtheria  and 
tetanus  antitoxins;  controls  for  yellow  fever,  tuberculosis,  smallpox,  and 
rabies;  and  methods  for  pasteurizing  milk.  At  Harvard  he  trained  a 
new  generation  of  doctors  and  health  officials  in  the  techniques  of 
preventive  medicine.  His  book,  Preventive  IsAedicine  and  Hygiene,  pub- 
lished in  1913,  became  the  standard  text  in  the  field  and  in  revised 
form  is  still  in  use  today.'* 

Rosenau  no  doubt  deserved  the  appellation  "Father  of  Preventive 
Medicine,"  but  the  modern  public  health  movement  can  trace  its  roots 
back  nearly  two  centuries  to  the  industrial  revolution  in  Great  Britain. 
"The  same  process  that  created  the  market  economy,  the  factory,  and 


the  modern  urban  environment,"  wrote  historian  George  Rosen,  "also 
brought  into  being  the  health  problems  that  made  necessary  new  means 
of  disease  prevention  and  health  protection."  Poverty,  overcrowding, 
poor  sanitation,  and  geographical  mobility,  which  were  the  negative 
outcomes  of  urbanization  and  industrialization,  created  conditions  favor- 
able to  the  spread  of  diseases  that  threatened  all  segments  of  society.  ^ 

Until  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century,  two  schools  of  thought 
concerning  the  cause  and  prevention  of  disease  predominated.  Conta- 
gionists  located  the  cause  of  disease  in  infective  agents  that  could  be 
transferred  by  people,  by  intermediate  carriers,  or  through  the  air.  They 
advocated  strict  quarantine  to  protect  the  community  at  large.  Adherents 
of  a  miasmatic  theory  contended  that  communicable  diseases  arose 
from  effluvia  produced  by  decaying  organic  matter.  They  fought  for 
sanitary  reform.  Generally,  some  combination  of  these  two  theories 
defined  public  health  policy,  and  the  engineers,  social  reformers,  and 
physicians  who  shared  the  leadership  of  the  movement  focused  their 
efforts  on  cleaning  up  the  environment,  maintaining  a  clean  water 
supply,  and  quarantining  affected  areas.* 

Revolutionary  changes  in  the  scientific  understanding  of  disease 
and  its  prevention  took  place  in  the  late  nineteenth  century.  A  series 
of  discoveries  by  European  scientists  established  "that  specific  microscopic 
creatures  rather  than  vague  chemical  miasmas  produce[d]  infectious  dis- 
eases." As  this  germ  theory  gained  wide  acceptance,  the  individual, 
rather  than  the  whole  society,  became  the  focus  of  public  health.  Bac- 
teriology superseded  engineering  as  the  science  of  public  health,  and 
the  medical  doctor  began  to  challenge  the  engineer  as  the  spokesman 
for  the  movement.^ 

During  the  Progressive  Era,  American  reformers  used  these  discov- 
eries to  attack  the  health  problems  that  multiplied  as  waves  of  immigrants 
filled  the  slums  and  sweatshops  of  northern  cities.  One  wing  of  the 
public  health  movement  focused  on  the  inefficiency  of  unregulated 
economic  activity  that  neglected  the  public  and  private  needs  of  the 
less  fortunate.  This  group  advocated  the  expansion  of  scientific  knowledge 
and  the  application  of  sound  business  practices  to  the  delivery  of  health 
services.  A  smaller  group  of  reformers  highlighted  the  injustices  of  a 
competitive  marketplace.  They  too  believed  scientific  advancements 
held  the  answer  to  many  health  problems,  but  they  also  stressed  the 
need  for  improvements  in  housing,  working  conditions,  and  access  to 
medical  services. 


Prominent  among  those  who  stressed  the  larger  social  environment 
were  Alice  Hamilton  and  Charles-Edward  A.  Winslow.  In  1920  Hamilton 
discovered  that  lead  poisoning  was  killing  thousands  of  American  workers. 
Campaigning  for  the  improvement  of  working  conditions,  she  almost 
single-handedly  founded  the  practice  of  industrial  hygiene.  Winslow, 
whose  thinking  would  have  an  impact  on  some  of  the  major  figures  in 
public  health  at  Chapel  Hill,  advocated  an  expansive  definition  of  public 
health  as  "the  science  and  art  of  preventing  disease,  prolonging  life,  and 
promoting  physical  health  and  efficiency  through  organized  community 
efforts.''^ 

The  trajectory  of  public  health  efforts  in  the  South  paralleled  that 
in  Europe  and  the  northern  United  States;  only  the  timing  differed. 
The  persistence  of  a  rural,  agricultural  economy  precluded  a  dramatic 
increase  in  public  health  problems  in  the  antebellum  South.  North 
Carolina  and  other  southern  states  had  their  share  of  illnesses,  early 
deaths,  and  even  occasional  epidemics,  but  these  struck  the  slave  popu- 
lation disproportionately.  They  were  seen,  in  any  case,  as  natural  occur- 
rences, not  something  to  be  prevented  by  man.  Sustained  efforts  to 
improve  the  health  of  the  Souths  citizens  began  in  the  years  after  the 
Civil  War.  Smallpox  and  typhoid  epidemics  swept  the  region  as  Con- 
federate soldiers  returned  home,  and  freed  men  and  women  gathered  in 
towns.  After  the  war,  the  creation  of  a  free  labor  market,  the  rise  of 
sharecropping,  the  expansion  of  the  tobacco  manufacturing  and  cotton 
textile  industries,  and  the  growth  of  Piedmont  urban  areas  created  even 
greater  health  problems. 

In  1877  the  North  Carolina  legislature  established  the  State  Board 
of  Health  to  advise  lawmakers  on  sanitary  matters  affecting  the  health 
of  citizens.  Initially,  the  board  had  little  power  and  few  resources;  its 
primary  objective  was  to  educate  North  Carolinians  about  possible 
health  risks.  But  over  the  years  the  efforts  of  its  first  two  secretaries, 
Dr.  Thomas  F.  Wood  and  Dr.  Richard  H.  Lewis,  and  growing  public 
awareness  of  health  issues  increased  the  board's  influence.  The  board 
became  involved  in  the  control  and  prevention  of  contagious  diseases, 
the  improvement  of  sanitary  conditions,  the  collection  of  vital  statistics, 
and  the  organization  of  county  health  boards.  The  board's  Health  Bulletin 
was  the  first  state  publication  in  the  country  to  issue  monthly  reports 
on  public  health.' 


Dr.  Richard  Henry  Lewis,  Secretary 
of  tKe  State  Board  of  Health,  1892-1909 


AN  ENEMY  TO  MANKIND 

It  slays  the  tiny  baby  at  mother's  breast.  Happy,  joyous  youth  falls  victim  to 
poison  it  spreads.  The  strength  of  adult  life  is  of  no  avail.  The  fly  is  no 
respecter  of  age,  of  sex,  of  color.  It  is  the  enemy  of  all.  It  must  be  fought 
and  conquered. 


An  example  of  the  graphics  used  in  the  Health 
Bulletin  to  educate  North  Carolinians  about 
health  issues. 


The  year  1909  marked  a  turning  point  in  public  health  work  in 
North  Carolina.  Dr.  Lewis  had  served  as  president  of  the  American 
Public  Health  Association,  and  he  saw  the  need  for  an  expansion  and 
reorganization  of  public  health  forces  in  the  state.  He  convinced  law- 
makers to  increase  the  State  Board  of  Health's  annual  appropriation  so 
that  it  could  employ  a  full-time  state  health  officer  and  maintain  a 
tuberculosis  sanatorium.  The  1909  North  Carolina  General  Assembly 
also  gave  the  board  greater  authority  over  public  water  supplies. '° 

Dr.  Watson  Smith  Rankin,  dean  of  the  Wake  Forest  medical  school, 
replaced  Lewis  as  secretary  of  the  board  and  as  the  state's  first  full-time 
health  officer.  Rankin  proved  to  be  an  unusually  effective  administrator, 
and  during  his  tenure  (1909-25)  North  Carolina  was  in  the  vanguard  of 
the  public  health  movement.  Rankin  oversaw  phenomenal  growth  in 
public  health  activities  in  the  state:  the  annual  appropriation  of  the 
State  Board  of  Health  increased  from  $10,500  in  1909  to  $340,000  in 
1925.  Like  other  Progressive  Era  reformers,  Rankin  argued  that  expendi- 
tures for  public  health  were  in  the  long  run  cost  effective.  But  Rankin 
also  maintained  a  relatively  broad  interpretation  of  public  health  that 
stressed  education  and  immediate  treatment,  and  he  was  not  afraid  at 
times  to  step  on  the  toes  of  the  medical  profession.  The  State  Board  of 
Health  gave  the  Health  Bulletin  a  more  popular  design  and  expanded  its 
circulation.  Office  staff  produced  movies  and  daily  newspaper  articles 
for  statewide  distribution,  while  doctors  and  dentists  began  examining 
children  in  the  public  schools,  in  many  cases  providing  on-site  treat- 
ment. This  program  of  on-site  treatment  was  viewed  with  alarm  by 
some  local  doctors,  who  opposed  the  provision  of  any  medical  services 
by  the  state." 

Public  health  issues  in  North  Carolina  received  a  further  boost  when 
John  D.  Rockefeller  gave  $1  million  to  establish  the  Rockefeller  Sanitary 
Commission  for  the  Eradication  of  Hookworm  Disease.  Around  the 
turn  of  the  century.  Dr.  Charles  W.  Stiles,  a  zoologist  connected  with 
the  United  States  Public  Health  Service,  documented  the  prevalence  of 
the  disease  among  poor  white  farmers  and  mill  workers  in  the  South. 
Underestimating  the  effects  of  poverty  caused  by  the  Civil  War,  share- 
cropping,  and  industrial  labor,  he  blamed  the  parasite  for  the  "inferior 
physical  development  and  mental  powers"  of  the  "cracker."  Stiles  had 
trouble  convincing  anyone  of  the  seriousness  of  the  problem,  but  by 
way  of  Walter  Hines  Page  and  the  Country  Life  Commission— a  national 


Improper  privy  construction  was  a 
major  cause  of  hookworm  infection 
in  North  Carolina. 


campaign  to  uplift  rural  folk— he  met  Frederick  Gates,  who  oversaw  the 
Rockefeller  philanthropies.  Gates  and  the  Rockefellers  already  had  a 
strong  interest  in  the  regeneration  of  the  southern  economy  through 
the  General  Educational  Board.  Improving  the  health  and  increasing 
the  productivity  of  the  region's  workers  fit  squarely  into  their  plans. 
Hookworm  was  also  the  perfect  disease  to  highlight  the  benefits  of  public 
health  and  philanthropy.  Diagnosis  and  cure  were  relatively  simple  and 
inexpensive,  and  the  results  were  quick  and  dramatic.  ^^ 

The  Sanitary  Commission  identified  North  Carolina  as  one  of 
eleven  southern  states  where  a  significant  number  of  people  suffered  from 
the  disease.  Because  many  North  Carolinians  distrusted  the  intentions 
of  wealthy  northerners  like  the  Rockefellers,  the  Sanitary  Commission 
worked  through  a  Bureau  for  Hookworm  Control  established  by  the 


A  hookworm  dispensary  in 
Lincoln  County,  North  Carolina. 


COUNTY   DISPENl^f^ " 
OR  FREE  TRE.ATMEf 


State  Board  of  Health.  The  bureau  identified  the  areas  most  heavily 
infected  by  the  disease,  then  provided  educational  materials  to  schools 
and  county  health  departments  in  the  affected  communities.  In  1911 
the  campaign  established  dispensaries  in  which  teams  of  doctors,  micro- 
scopists,  and  record-keepers  set  up  tents  to  educate  and  treat  the  local 
population.'^ 

The  campaign  dramatically  reduced  the  incidence  of  hookworm  in 
the  state,  but  perhaps  more  importantly  it  stimulated  greater  efforts  in 
public  health.  Dr.  Benjamin  E.  Washburn,  a  Rutherfordton  physician 
who  participated  in  the  hookworm  campaign,  later  observed  that  "[t]he 
cooperative  work  for  the  control  of  hookworm  disease  marked  the  be- 
ginning of  active  public  health  work  in  North  Carolina  and  in  the 
South."  The  campaign  also  served  as  an  initiation  for  a  number  of 
North  Carolina  doctors  like  Washburn  who  went  on  to  play  important 
roles  in  the  national  and  international  public  health  movement. ''* 

The  hookworm  campaign  convinced  Wickliffe  Rose,  director  of  the 
Sanitary  Commission  and  its  successor,  the  International  Health  Board, 
that  the  county  was  the  most  effective  unit  for  public  health  work  and 
the  county  health  officer  the  most  important  administrator.  But  Rose 
remained  equally  certain  that  the  movement  could  not  rely  on  local 
physicians  and  volunteers;  it  needed  trained,  professional  leaders. 
Efficiency-minded  reformers  such  as  Rose  deplored  interference  by  local 
political  elites,  who  often  viewed  health  officers  as  patronage  appoint- 
ments. In  keeping  with  the  general  thrust  of  Progressive  Era  reform, 
public  health  advocates  sought  to  develop  a  cadre  of  scientifically  trained 
professionals  who  would  be  above  partisan  political  squabbles.'^ 

The  Rockefeller  Foundation's  vast  resources  and  experience  in 
restructuring  medical  education  put  it  in  position  to  assume  leadership 
in  the  training  of  these  public  health  professionals.  Under  the  leadership 
of  Abraham  Flexner,  the  Rockefeller  Foundation's  General  Education 
Board  had  developed  national  standards  for  medical  schools  seeking 
philanthropic  support.  Schools  had  to  be  connected  to  a  large  university, 
research  and  educational  programs  had  to  be  linked  to  clinical  depart- 
ments with  access  to  laboratories  and  a  university  hospital,  and  teaching 
staffs  had  to  be  employed  full  time.  Using  Rockefeller  funds,  Flexner 
was  able  to  develop  a  small  group  of  elite  medical  schools  that  were 
clinically  oriented.  A  similar  strategy  evolved  in  relation  to  schools  of 
public  health,  and  for  twenty  years,  until  the  federal  government  took 


"Selma  Ellis  of  Columbus  county.  Photograph  made  at  county  dispensary.  Age 
16,  weight  62 '/z  pounds;  anemic  ulcer  on  leg;  ill  8  years.  He  was  unable  to  go 
to  school  or  work;  in  fact  he  was  unable  to  sit  or  stand.  Notice  the  change 
made  in  7  weeks  by  a  few  cents  worth  of  thymol." 


Before  and  after  photograph  of 

hookwornn  carrier.  Such  formal 

portraits  were  often  used  to 

highlight  the  success  of  the 

hookworm  treatment  and  reflected 

the  reformers'  hope  that  improved 

health  would  instill  middle-class 

values  in  former  victims. 


"Selma  Ellis  seven  weeks  later  after  taking  the 

hookworm  treatment.  He  was  able  to  walk  and  run; 

weighed  79  pounds;  and  during  the  past  winter  he  has 

been  in  school." 


10 


over  in  the  1930s,  the  foundation  exercised  enormous  influence  over 
public  health  instruction.'* 

In  1915  Wickliffe  Rose  drew  up  an  initial  plan  calling  for  a  national 
system  of  public  health  education,  headed  by  a  "central,  scientific  school" 
devoted  to  research  and  teaching  and  supplemented  by  state  programs 
that  were  focused  more  on  short  courses  and  outreach  and  affiliated 
with  a  medical  school  and  state  health  departments.  In  the  end,  how- 
ever, the  General  Education  Board  announced  its  decision  to  fund  a 
school  at  The  Johns  Hopkins  University  but  made  no  mention  of  the 
practice-oriented  state  schools.  As  was  the  case  with  medical  education, 
scientific  research  and  clinical  training  remained  foremost  in  the  minds 
of  foundation  leaders.'^ 


f 

'        li 

;^ 

_^. 

Jm. 

Outdoor  dental  health  clinic  at  rural  school  in  Wilson  County,  North  Carolina. 


11 


Meanwhile,  the  push  to  find  new  markets  and  sources  of  raw 
materials  had  taken  the  industrialized  nations  into  parts  of  the  world 
where  disease  and  unsanitary  conditions  prevented  a  full  utilization  of 
human  and  natural  resources.  Some  means  had  to  be  found  to  train 
"foot  soldiers"  for  the  public  health  movement  at  home  and  abroad. 
The  Rockefeller  Foundation  saw  the  South  as  another  such  underde- 
veloped' region,  and  as  it  expanded  its  public  health  work  overseas,  it 
drew  on  its  experience  in  the  region.  In  1913,  for  example,  the  founda- 
tion's International  Health  Board  used  the  Sanitary  Commission's  work 
in  North  Carolina  as  a  model  for  its  hookworm  campaign  in  the  British 
West  Indies.  When  the  board  decided  to  establish  a  training  site  that 
would  serve  as  a  model  for  local  health  departments,  it  also  looked  to 
North  Carolina  for  a  location,  and  to  a  North  Carolinian  for  a  director. 
Dr.  Benjamin  E.  Washburn  set  up  shop  in  Wilson  County  in  1916. 
State  Health  Officer  Rankin  was  so  impressed  with  the  success  of  the 
training  site  that  he  asked  Washburn  to  direct  a  new  Bureau  of  County 
Health  Work  in  the  State  Board  of  Health.  The  Rockefeller  Foundation 
continued  to  pay  Washburn's  salary,  and  he  moved  quickly  to  set  up 
county  health  departments  modeled  on  the  Wilson  experiment.'^ 

University  of  North  Carolina  officials,  aware  of  the  advances  in 
public  health  work  in  the  state,  were  eager  to  get  involved.  Health  issues 
became  the  focus  of  much  discussion  on  campus  in  the  spring  of  1919. 
The  influenza  epidemic  of  the  previous  winter  and  the  surprisingly 
poor  physical  condition  of  recent  army  recruits  prompted  concern  among 
politicians  and  educators.  In  response,  the  legislature  allocated  money 
for  a  campus  health  officer.  Dr.  William  deB.  MacNider  of  the  University 
of  North  Carolina  School  of  Medicine  saw  this  as  an  opportunity  to 
hire  someone  who,  in  addition  to  serving  the  university,  might  also 
cooperate  with  the  Board  of  Health  in  providing  training  for  public 
health  workers.  He  put  the  idea  to  State  Health  Officer  Rankin,  who 
responded  coolly,  believing  that  the  "scientific  and  theoretical  training" 
given  at  the  university  would  be  impractical  for  public  officials.  MacNider 
eventually  won  the  ear  of  Rankin's  assistant,  Benjamin  Washburn,  who 
convinced  the  board  to  submit  to  the  university  a  tentative  proposal 
for  a  training  school.  The  board  saw  two  related  benefits  from  such  a 
plan.  First,  university  students  who  were  exposed  to  "the  rules  of  hygiene 
and  sanitation"  would  become  proponents  of  public  health  once  back 
in  their  own  communities.  Second,  the  university  could  help  train  des- 
perately needed  health  officers  and  public  health  nurses.'' 


12 


CLEAN      UP! 

Cleanliness  Is  Next  lb  Godliness 


Boesyour 
Back  Yard 

look 

like 
this? 


Or 

like. 

this? 


Open-top 

WeUs 

admit. 

Filth  and 

Drainage. 


UseaPump 
withcancDttop 

andha^eaD 
drainage  away 
fioteynirwdL 


Is 
your  Privy 

a 
Disease 
Spreader? 


IsitRy- 
ti^it,  placed 
oireraPit  & 

lOOyaids 
fromynrwd? 


Doesyoiir 
Kitchen 

look 

like 
this? 


Or 

is  it 

Screened 

Qean  S- 

Conwenient? 


Dirty. 

Dusty, 
living  Rroms 

cause 
PoorHeaJth 

Do  you 
buy 

Food 
from  stores 
like  this? 


Keep 
the  House 

Clean 
Screened  & 
Comfortable 


Or 

do  you 

buy 

only 

Clean  R»d? 


^  KEEP        CLEAN 

Siaie  Board  of  Health ,  Raleigh,  N.C. 


Graphic  from  Health  Bulletin 


13 


Students  at  the  University  of  North  Carolina  being  sworn  into  the  Students 
Army   Training   Corps   in    1918.   The   poor   physical   condition   of  student 
recruits  prompted  calls  for  health  education  on  campus.  Old  East  is  in  the 
background. 


Harry  Washburn  Chase,  President  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina,  1919-30 


University  President  Harry  Washburn  Chase  welcomed  the  board's 
proposal.  He  described  his  vision  of  the  project  in  a  letter  to  Dr.  W.  P. 
Jacocks,  a  leading  candidate  to  head  up  the  effort: 

It  is  not  our  ambition  to  develop  here  a  school  of  public  health, 
nor  could  we  of  course  hope  to  compete  with  the  work  done  at 
Harvard  or  The  Hopkins,  in  case  we  desired  to  do  so.  We  merely 
want  to  take  a  few  practical  steps  toward  making  it  a  little  easier  for 
a  medical  graduate,  who  is  interested  in  public  health  matters  and 
who  cannot  spend  the  time  to  go  to  a  school  of  public  health,  to 
get  some  training  in  the  basic  things  he  will  need  to  meet. 

The  supply  of  graduates  of  schools  of  public  health  is  at  present  so 
limited  that  it  seems  clear  that  health  positions  in  this  section 
cannot  for  a  number  of  years  be  filled  from  the  ranks  of  such  grad- 
uates. We  therefore  feel  that  if  we  work  out  a  scheme  whereby  men 
could  be  given  about  three  months'  field  work  with  the  State  De- 
partment of  Health,  and  about  three  months'  training,  we  will  be 
meeting  a  need  which  is  very  real  and  very  vital.  Naturally  such 
men  would  not  have  the  grasp  of  their  problems  which  graduates  of 
the  formal  school  of  public  health  would  have,  but  they  would  be 
in  far  better  shape  to  handle  their  problems  than  they  would  be 
with  no  health  training  whatsoever.  I  believe  that  with  the  coopera- 
tion of  our  medical  school  and  the  engineering  faculties,  and  the 
other  departments  which  would  be  concerned,  we  could  make  the 
work  very  much  worth  while  to  such  men  as  would  come  here.^" 

Unfortunately,  these  early  plans  for  public  health  training  faltered. 
The  university  lacked  funds  for  the  necessary  equipment  and  capital 


14 


improvements  and  had  under  consideration  a  competing  plan  by  the 
United  States  Interdepartmental  Hygiene  Board  to  establish  a  Depart- 
ment of  Hygiene.  Rankin  continued  to  voice  doubts  about  the  utility 
of  university  training,  and  there  was  dissent  from  professors  who  feared 
the  training  program  might  lower  the  standards  of  the  university.  Still, 
MacNider  did  not  give  up  hope.  "I  would  like  to  see,"  he  wrote  Chase, 
"and  I  believe  it  is  our  duty  to  establish  a  professorship  of  public  health 
at  the  university."^^ 

The  1920s  proved  a  difficult  time  for  the  public  health  movement 
in  North  Carolina.  Dr.  Rankin  continued  to  provide  strong  leadership 
during  the  early  years  of  the  decade,  and  the  General  Assembly,  despite 
economic  hard  times  after  the  end  of  World  War  I,  steadily  increased 
its  appropriation  to  the  State  Board  of  Health.  More  and  more  counties 
established  full-time  health  departments,  and  an  ever  greater  number  of 
people  made  use  of  their  services.  But  the  simple  expansion  of  services 
could  not  cover  up  what  Rankin  and  a  number  of  other  progressive 


Dr.  William  deB.  MacNider 


15 


16 


public  health  leaders  saw  as  some  fundamental  weaknesses  of  the  move- 
ment: the  continued  political  control  of  local  health  positions  and  the 
general  inefficiency  of  most  county  health  departments.^^ 

Hoping  to  make  the  management  of  health  services  as  "rational"  as 
the  laboratory  dimension,  Rankin  introduced  two  schemes  designed  to 
improve  the  functioning  of  local  health  departments  and  local  health 
officers.  The  first  was  a  "piece-work"  plan  for  allocating  funds.  For 
instance,  instead  of  receiving  general  appropriations  for  vaccinations, 
counties  submitted  bills  for  the  number  they  performed.  Likewise,  the 
State  Board  of  Health  began  evaluating  health  officers  on  the  basis  of 
more  precise,  quantifiable  criteria.  Such  policies  had  some  impact  on 
health  services  in  the  state,  but  most  concerned  observers  continued  to 
see  the  scientific  training  of  public  health  professionals  as  the  sine  qua 
non  of  future  progress.  ^^ 

The  resignation  of  Dr.  Rankin  in  1925  to  become  director  of  the 
Hospital  and  Orphan  Division  of  the  Duke  Endowment  seriously 
hampered  public  health  activities  in  North  Carolina.  Although  the 
State  Board  of  Health  continued  to  expand  its  operations  until  the 
early  1930s,  much  of  the  board's  energy  was  taken  up  with  personnel 
problems  and  intermittent  conflicts  with  the  State  Medical  Society. 
State  Health  Officer  Charles  O'H.  Laughinghouse  discussed  starting  a 
training  station  for  health  officers  at  the  newly  established  Duke  Uni- 
versity Medical  College,  but  the  plan  never  materialized.^'* 

The  Great  Depression  unleashed  forces  that  ultimately  created  a 
more  favorable  climate  for  a  school  of  public  health  in  Chapel  Hill. 
President  Frank  Porter  Graham's  leadership  put  the  university  in  the 
forefront  of  reform  efforts  in  the  South.  Stringent  purse  tightening  caused 
major  changes  in  state  government  and  brought  new  leadership  to  the 
State  Board  of  Health.  Finally,  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt's  New  Deal  pro- 
vided funds  for  health  and  welfare  programs. 

The  perceived  need  for  greater  efficiency  in  state  government 
prompted  Governor  O.  Max  Gardner  to  ask  the  Brookings  Institute  in 
1930  to  "prepare  for  the  consideration  of  the  General  Assembly  a  com- 
plete, modern,  practical  setup  of  government  reorganization."  The  plan 
for  public  health  called  for  the  abolition  of  the  State  Board  of  Health 
and  the  relegation  of  the  State  Medical  Society  to  an  advisory  position 
in  public  health  matters.  Authority  would  be  centralized  in  an  executive 
department  headed  by  a  commissioner  appointed  by  the  governor.  The 


17 


Dr.  Charles  O'H.  Laughinghouse, 
State  Health  0//icer,  1926-1930 


Dr.  James  M.  Parrott, 

State  Health  Officer,  1931-1934 


State's  medical  profession  successfully  fought  the  proposed  changes,  but 
the  legislature  did  force  the  resignation  of  the  standing  board  and  give 
the  governor  veto  power  over  the  selection  of  the  state  health  officer.  ^^ 

The  new  board  selected  Dr.  James  M.  Parrott  as  state  health  officer. 
Parrott  went  to  work  quickly,  reorganizing  the  divisions  for  more  effi- 
cient functioning  and  withholding  money  from  counties  that  appointed 
health  officers  who  lacked  training  or  experience  in  public  health  ad- 
ministration. The  latter  policy  apparently  forced  Parrott  to  oppose  the 
appointment  of  some  long-time  friends,  but  he  persevered  in  his  deter- 
mination to  improve  the  functioning  of  health  officials  throughout  the 
state.  ^^ 

Soon  after  taking  office,  Parrott  approached  Dr.  John  A.  Ferrell,  a 
North  Carolinian  who  served  as  deputy-director  of  the  Rockefeller 
Foundation's  International  Health  Division,  about  a  grant  for  a  training 
base  for  county  health  officials.  By  requiring  such  training,  he  hoped  to 
weed  out  "incompetent"  doctors  who  might  later  be  nominated  by  county 
boards  of  health.  Ferrell  could  offer  no  encouragement.  His  response,  in 
fact,  pointed  to  what  the  Rockefeller  Foundation  saw  as  major  deficien- 
cies in  the  public  health  program  in  North  Carolina.  The  first  problem 
was  the  advanced  age  of  many  of  the  county  health  officers;  the  foun- 
dation did  not  encourage  training  for  men  over  fifty,  the  average  age  of 
health  officers  in  North  Carolina.  The  second  problem  was  the  state's 
poverty  and  its  dearth  of  public  health  professionals.  The  foundation 
would  fund  training  bases  only  where  the  states  contributed  50  percent 
of  the  costs  and  the  instructors  had  "academic,  medical  and  public 


18 


I 


Dr.  John  A.  Ferrell  directed  the  State 
Board  of  Health's  hookworm  eradica- 
tion program  before  joining  the  staff 
of  the  Rockefeller  Foundation.  He 
later  returned  to  North  Carolina  as 
Executive  Director  of  the  Medical 
Care  Commission. 


health  training"  of  the  "first  order."  North  Carolina  obviously  could  not 
provide  the  money,  and  Ferrell  questioned  whether  the  state  could  find 
such  instructors.  "We  had  been  hopeful"  he  wrote,  "that  each  of  the 
more  important  state  health  departments  would  arrange  for  their  young 
and  best  prepared  health  officers  to  have  courses  in  schools  of  public 
health,  so  that  for  administrative,  epidemiological,  or  teaching  assign- 
ments the  needed  personnel  could  be  drawn  from  within  the  state." 
"North  Carolina,"  he  continued,  "has  not  utilized  the  schools  of  public 
health  as  have  other  progressive  states."  Parrott  reminded  Ferrell  that 
the  state  had  produced  many  able  public  health  men,  such  as  W.  S. 
Rankin,  Benjamin  Washburn,  and  Ferrell  himself,  only  to  have  them 
snapped  up  by  organizations  like  the  Rockefeller  Foundation  and  Duke 
Endowment.  ^^ 

Parrott  did  not  abandon  his  hopes  for  the  training  center.  Together 
with  officials  of  the  university,  the  State  Board  of  Health  forged  ahead 
with  a  plan  for  a  school  in  Chapel  Hill.  Since  Orange  County  did  not 
have  a  full-time  health  officer,  the  director  of  the  school  would  also 
serve  in  that  capacity.  A  county  nurse,  sanitary  officer,  and  health  sec- 
retary would  double  as  instructors.  The  director  would  offer  a  course  in 


19 


Howard  Odum 


W.  T.  Couch 


Albert  Coates 


"It  is  a  strange  thing,  perhaps,  that  the 
University  has  grown  in  stature  by  getting 
down  closer  and  closer  to  the  earth  and 
the  people  around  it ....  Its  chief  greatness 
now,  it  seems  to  me,  lies  in  the  fact  that, 
in  addition  to  the  glory  that  was  Greece, 
the  grandeur  that  was  Rome,  the  immen- 
sity of  the  cosmos,  and  the  infiniteness  of 
the  atom,  it  has  looked  around  at  the 
human  qualities  of  the  State  and  the 
South.  Red-necked  farmers  have  become 
as  important  in  its  classrooms  as  Roman 
Senators  once  seemed  to  be,  and  for  all  I 
know,  may  be  now.  In  the  University, 
where  students  once  paid  a  black  man 
named  Benny  Booth  a  dime  to  let  them 
split  a  plank  over  his  skull,  there  is  an 
increasing  concern  for  what  goes  on  in 
other  black  skulls  and  in  an  inescapably 
black  and  white  Southern  world.  The 
new  School  of  Public  Health  (headed  by 
the  world's  leading  sanitarian  who  is  both 
a  Yankee  and  a  Jew)  is  an  aspect  of  the 
University's  public  concern."  (Jonathan 
Daniels,  TarHeels:  A  Portrait  of  hlorth 
Carolina) 


20 


preventive  medicine  at  the  Medical  School  in  hopes  of  attracting  some 
physicians  to  the  public  health  field.  Frank  Graham  offered  strong  sup- 
port for  the  effort.  Dr.  H.  G.  Baity,  dean  of  the  School  of  Engineering 
and  a  member  of  the  State  Board  of  Health,  served  as  a  liaison  between 
the  board  and  the  university.  Baity  told  board  members,  "We  of  the 
university  [consider]  none  of  our  functions  more  vital  or  of  greater  value 
to  the  state  than  the  adequate  training  of  personnel  who  are  engaged 
in  conserving  the  health  o{  our  people,  making  life  fuller,  longer,  and 
North  Carolina  a  more  wholesome  place  in  which  to  live."^® 

Dr.  Parrott's  efforts  greatly  impressed  Ferrell.  "In  my  judgment," 
Ferrell  wrote  to  a  member  of  his  staff,  "conditions  in  North  Carolina 
now  merit  liberal  cooperation  from  our  organization."  Nevertheless,  the 
Rockefeller  Foundation  could  find  no  funds  for  the  proposed  training 
school.  The  Depression  prohibited  philanthropic  contributions  on  the 
scale  of  those  in  the  1910s  and  1920s,  but  the  Rockefeller  Foundation 
did  provide  scholarships  for  two  State  Board  of  Health  officials  and 
loaned  a  member  of  its  own  staff  to  the  State  Board  of  Health.^' 

By  the  early  1930s  the  university  had  become  a  center  for  reform- 
minded  southerners.  Frank  Graham  stood  as  a  symbol  of  the  school's 
liberality,  but  others  like  Howard  Odum  of  the  Institute  for  Research  in 
Social  Science  and  W.  T.  Couch  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina 
Press  were  also  committed  to  addressing  the  region's  economic  and 
social  problems. ^° 

A  more  cautious  group  of  university-based  reformers  concentrated 
on  the  waste  and  inefficiency  caused  by  antiquated  bureaucratic  structures 
and  poorly  trained  government  employees.  In  the  early  1930s,  Albert 
Coates,  a  law  professor  at  the  university,  established  the  Institute  of 
Government,  which  offered  short  courses  and  provided  technical  advice 
for  elected  and  appointed  officials.  "The  need  for  training  in  our  gov- 
ernmental personnel  is  painfully  apparent,"  Coates  told  a  gathering  of 
government  officials  in  1932.  "[T]he  hope  of  popular  government  is  not 
so  much  wrapped  up  in  theories  of  government,  centralized  or  localized, 
as  in  the  effective  and  efficient  handling  of  governmental  affairs  by 
effective  and  efficient  governmental  officers."^' 

In  1932  the  university  also  established  a  School  of  Public  Admin- 
istration to  provide  more  formal  training  for  public  officials.  An  important 
feature  of  the  new  curriculum  was  a  program  in  public  health  adminis- 
tration designed  for  physicians  who  were  already  engaged  in  public 


21 


health  work  or  wished  to  enter  the  field.  The  faculty  would  be  drawn 
from  various  schools  on  the  Chapel  Hill  campus  and  from  the  State 
Board  of  Health  in  Raleigh.  Unfortunately,  when  the  school  offered  a 
"Short  Course  in  Public  Health  Administration"  in  the  fall  of  1933, 
only  three  students  registered,  and  the  course  had  to  be  canceled.  The 
shortage  of  state  funds  prevented  some  interested  persons  from  applying, 
but  the  program  also  needed  to  build  a  constituency  among  health 
workers  if  it  was  to  succeed.  ^^ 

Meanwhile,  efforts  to  devise  some  workable  scheme  for  public 
health  work  continued.  M.  V.  Ziegler  of  the  Public  Health  Service 
prodded  the  Medical  School,  the  School  of  Engineering,  and  the  State 
Board  of  Health  to  cooperate  in  offering  two  twelve-week  short  courses 
during  the  1934-35  academic  year.  The  eleven  students  divided  their 
time  between  classroom  instruction  in  sanitary  engineering,  vital  statistics, 
and  epidemiology  and  "practical  work"  at  State  Board  of  Health  facilities 
in  Raleigh  and  at  county  health  departments.  The  program  failed  to 
attract  enough  qualified  in-state  students  to  justify  continuing  the  courses 
the  next  summer,  but  Medical  School  Dean  Charles  Mangum  appealed 
to  the  Public  Health  Service  to  provide  funding  that  would  allow  the 
university  to  accept  students  from  other  states.  The  Public  Health  Ser- 
vice responded  favorably,  and  Mangum  prepared  a  plan  for  the  State 
Board  of  Health  to  submit  to  Washington.  ^^ 

This  time  the  plan  took,  thanks  in  large  measure  to  heightened 
interest  in  public  health  at  the  federal  level.  Even  as  Mangum  was 
drawing  up  his  plan.  Congress  had  under  consideration  the  most  far- 
reaching  piece  of  social  legislation  in  the  nation's  history,  the  Social 
Security  Act.  The  act  contained  key  provisions  relating  to  public  health. 
An  advisory  committee  appointed  by  President  Franklin  Roosevelt  in 
1934  to  study  long-term  economic  problems  recognized  that  "illness  is 
one  of  the  major  causes  of  economic  insecurity  which  threaten  people 
of  small  means  in  good  times  as  in  bad."  A  logical  way  to  deal  with 
such  suffering,  the  committee  concluded,  was  to  take  steps  to  prevent 
sickness.  The  committee  recommended  grants  to  states  for  local  health 
programs,  funds  for  training  public  health  workers,  and  additional 
personnel  for  the  Public  Health  Service.^ 

Although  allocations  for  public  health  paled  in  comparison  to  the 
cost  of  social  security,  they  helped  sway  influential  southern  congressmen 
who  were  otherwise  critical  of  the  bill.  Title  VI  earmarked  much  of  the 
money  for  states  where  poverty  had  limited  public  health  work,  and 


22 


President  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt  signing  the  Social  Security  Act. 


Dr.  Charles  Mangum 


Frank  Porter  Graham 


23 


southern  public  health  officials  appeared  before  Congress  to  support 
the  legislation.  Conservatives  also  saw  public  health  programs  as  a  way 
to  counter  growing  support  for  national  health  insurance.  The  House 
and  Senate  passed  the  bill  in  the  summer  of  1935,  and  President 
Roosevelt  signed  it  on  August  14.^^ 

Anxious  to  take  advantage  of  the  availability  of  federal  funding, 
Dean  Mangum  stepped  up  his  search  for  someone  to  head  the  university's 
proposed  public  health  program.  State  Health  Officer  Carl  Reynolds's 
notice  of  Dr.  Milton  J.  Rosenau's  resignation  that  September  came  in 
the  midst  of  this  search.  Once  Rosenau  expressed  interest  in  coming  to 
Chapel  Hill,  Dean  Mangum  invited  him  to  meet  with  representatives  of 
the  university,  the  State  Board  of  Health,  and  the  Public  Health  Service. 
On  December  13,  1935,  the  parties  agreed  to  establish  a  Division  of 
Public  Health  in  the  Medical  School  that  would  serve  as  a  regional 
training  center  for  public  health  workers  in  interstate  Sanitary  District 
Number  2,  made  up  of  Delaware,  Florida,  Georgia,  Maryland,  North 
Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Virginia,  and  West  Virginia.  Rosenau  accepted 
the  position  as  director,  and  the  university  agreed  to  begin  admitting 
students  the  following  January.  ^^ 


Dr.  Carl  Reynolds, 
State  Health  Officer,  1934-1947 


24 


Qhapt 


THE  EARLY  YEAR 


tate  and  university  officials  greeted  Dr.  Rosenau's  arrival  in  1936 
with  great  fanfare.  "Your  eminence,  your  training  and  experience, 
and  your  personality  and  spirit  cause  us  to  welcome  you  with 
sincere  enthusiasm,"  wrote  Frank  Graham.  Newspapers  throughout  North 
Carolina  carried  word  of  the  new  undertaking.  State  Health  Officer  Carl 
V.  Reynolds  called  Rosenau  "the  foremost  teacher  of  public  health  matters 
in  the  world"  and  the  establishment  of  the  school  "one  of  the  most 


Dr.  Milton  I.  Rosenau 


25 


important  events  in  this  state  for  the  last  25  years."  Members  of  the 
Buncombe  County  Medical  Society  welcomed  the  "increased  influence 
and  prestige  and  power"  that  would  accrue  to  the  university  and  the 
state  with  Rosenau's  arrival.^ 

Rosenau  met  his  admirers  at  a  gathering  of  public  health  officials 
and  medical  educators  on  the  Chapel  Hill  campus.  Frank  Graham's 
introduction  praised  Rosenau  for  his  dedication  to  the  cause  of  public 
health  and  for  his  willingness  at  the  end  of  a  life  filled  with  honors 
and  high  position  to  lead  the  foundling  program  at  Chapel  Hill.  Then 
Dr.  Rosenau  took  the  floor.  "The  epidemiologist  is  a  disease  detective" 
he  told  his  audience.  "[We]  hunt  and  determine  the  causes  of  diseases 
and  then  track  down  the  mode  of  transmission."  T)  underscore  the 
tragedy  of  epidemics,  Rosenau  described  a  plague  in  Stratford-on-Avon 
during  Shakespeare's  childhood.  The  great  dramatist  survived,  but  how 
many  similar  geniuses  had  been  lost,  he  wondered.  "We  find  monuments 
erected  to  heroes  who  have  won  wars,  but  we  have  none  commemorat- 
ing anyone  who  prevented  a  war.  The  same  is  true  with  epidemics.  But 
preventive  medicine  is  coming  into  its  own."^ 

State  and  local  health  associations  inundated  Rosenau  with  requests 
to  address  their  groups.  They  looked  to  him  for  inspiration  for  their 
own  troops  and  for  influence  with  local  political  officials.  Rosenau  ven- 
tured out  when  he  could,  but  setting  up  the  Division  of  Public  Health 
required  most  of  his  time.  Four  health  officer  trainees  registered  for 
courses  during  the  winter  quarter,  but  they  were  only  the  beginning. 
Students  supported  by  funds  from  the  Social  Security  Act  began  arriving 
in  the  spring.  By  March  28,  fifty-one  health  officers,  sanitary  engineers, 
sanitarians,  and  sanitary  officers  had  registered.  All  the  members  of 
Interstate  Sanitary  District  Number  2,  with  the  exception  of  Maryland, 
sent  representatives.  Rosenau  taught  epidemiology  and  the  medical  faculty 
helped  out,  but  the  staff  of  the  State  Board  of  Health  handled  much  of 
the  instruction  and  classroom  work.  Without  their  efforts,  the  school 
could  not  have  opened.^ 

Rosenau's  most  pressing  tasks  that  first  spring  involved  raising 
money  and  building  a  faculty.  Unlike  The  Johns  Hopkins  and  Harvard, 
which  received  substantial  endowments  as  well  as  operating  costs  from 
the  Rockefeller  Foundation,  the  division  at  Chapel  Hill  relied  on  a  small 
appropriation  from  the  university,  funds  from  the  Public  Health  Service, 
and  the  tuition  of  students.  Rosenau  knew  about  Chapel  Hill's  limited 


26 


resources  when  he  took  the  job,  but  he  had  no  intention  of  sitting 
still.  He  aspired  to  build  a  program  to  compete  with  Harvard  and  The 
Hopkins.'' 

Rosenau  used  his  personal  influence  in  Washington  to  secure  an 
additional  allocation  from  the  Public  Health  Service  for  two  full-time 
professors.  "This  is  to  relieve  the  strain  on  the  State  Board  of  Health 
and  to  make  a  nucleus  of  a  small,  well-knit,  full-time  faculty  to  carry 
on  the  bulk  of  the  teaching,"  he  wrote  Dean  Mangum.  Dr.  Robert  E.  Fox 
joined  the  faculty  as  professor  of  public  health  administration.  As  di- 
rector of  county  health  work  for  the  State  Board  of  Health,  Fox  had 
been  involved  in  the  initiation  of  public  health  training  at  the  university. 
He  taught  on  a  full-time  basis  for  six  months  of  the  year  and  worked 
for  the  board  during  the  remaining  time.  This  arrangement  continued 
the  close  cooperation  between  the  state  and  the  university  and  allowed 
the  division  to  grow  gradually.^ 

Dr.  Herman  Glenn  Baity,  a  professor  of  sanitary  engineering,  a 
former  dean  of  the  School  of  Engineering  at  Chapel  Hill,  and  at  the 
time  director  of  the  Public  Works  Administration  (PWA)  in  North 


Dr.  Herman  G.  Baity 


27 


lu-La  till  Lu  kLiilXuiiliiiiJlrliiil, 


28 


Carolina,  also  came  on  board  in  the  summer  of  1936.  Baity 's  appoint- 
ment was  anything  but  routine.  The  year  before,  the  Board  of  Trustees, 
at  the  urging  of  Frank  Graham,  moved  the  School  of  Engineering  at 
Chapel  Hill  to  North  Carolina  State  College  in  Raleigh  as  part  of  the 
1933  consolidation  of  the  schools  in  Greensboro,  Chapel  Hill,  and 
Raleigh.  Economics  motivated  Graham's  decision,  but  the  move  also 
represented  an  effort  to  build  up  the  Raleigh  campus  and  make  con- 
solidation more  equitable.  Many  Chapel  Hill  alumni  and  some  faculty 
members  voiced  strong  opposition  to  the  proposal.  Baity  among  them. 
As  a  concession,  Graham  placed  engineering  faculty  who  did  not  want 
to  move  to  Raleigh  in  other  departments  at  Chapel  Hill.  Baity  moved 
the  program  in  sanitary  engineering  into  the  Division  of  Public  Health, 
where  he  retained  some  of  his  assistants,  his  laboratory,  and  the  right 
to  grant  advanced  degrees.* 

Baity  brought  many  qualities  to  his  position  as  professor  of  sanitary 
engineering.  He  was  a  native  North  Carolinian,  a  graduate  of  the  uni- 
versity (B.A.  in  liberal  arts  in  1917  and  B.S.  in  engineering  in  1922),  a 
member  of  the  State  Board  of  Health,  a  nationally  known  sanitary 
engineer,  and  a  Public  Works  administrator  with  strong  connections  in 
Washington.  Among  his  many  distinctions.  Baity  had  been  the  first 
person  to  earn  a  doctorate  in  sanitary  engineering  (Harvard,  1928).'' 

When  classes  began  in  the  fall  of  1936,  forty-six  students  enrolled 
in  the  Division  of  Public  Health.  Among  them  was  A.  Worth  Petty,  a 
recent  graduate  in  sanitary  engineering  at  North  Carolina  State  College 
employed  by  the  State  Board  of  Health.  The  program  "looked  like  a 
bonanza,"  he  remembered,  "because  they  were  going  to  pay  my  salary 
and  pick  up  all  my  travel,  and  a  public  health  scholarship  paid  for  the 
fees,  tuition,  and  books.  They  broke  us  up  into  groups.  If  you  didn't 
have  a  degree  you  were  a  sanitary  officer.  If  you  had  a  degree  other 
than  medicine  or  engineering  you  were  a  sanitarian.  If  you  had  a  degree 
in  engineering,  of  course,  you  were  an  engineer  and  a  degree  in  medi- 
cine [made  you]  a  health  officer."^ 

Students  took  courses  in  public  health  administration,  epidemiology, 
vital  statistics,  principles  of  sanitation,  and  child  hygiene.  "The  big 
course  was  epidemiology  with  Dr.  Rosenau,"  Petty  recalled.  "This  big 
book  he  had  written,  thicker  than  the  Sears  &  Roebuck  catalog,  was 
the  whole  story  on  everything  to  do  with  communicable  diseases." 
Rosenau  did  not  limit  his  instructional  materials  to  the  lectern,  black- 


29 


Among  the  early  successes  of  the  division  was  a  summer  short  course  in  public 
health  dentistry  in  1936.  The  State  Board  of  Health  had  initiated  an  oral  hygiene 
program  in  public  schools  in  1918,  and  over  the  years  the  program  had  enjoyed 
great  success.  In  1937,  the  board  had  seventeen  dentists  on  the  staff,  who  spent 
their  time  in  the  public  schools  of  North  Carolina  teaching  oral  hygiene,  examin- 
ing the  mouths  of  school  children,  giving  treatment  to  those  who  could  not 
afford  to  consult  a  private  dentist,  and  referring  others  to  their  family  dentist. 
Unfortunately,  the  lack  of  funds  prevented  the  continuation  of  the  summer  short 
course  after  a  few  years. 


30 


board,  and  textbook.  The  students  staged  a  mock  courtroom  trial  to 
demonstrate  their  knowledge  of  the  social  dimensions  of  disease  control. 
Dr.  Rosenau  presided,  dressed  up  in  his  black  robe  and  wig.  "It  was  a 
remarkable  course,"  Petty  recalled.  "We  thoroughly  enjoyed  it."' 

Despite  Rosenau's  occasional  clowning,  the  program  proved  quite 
rigorous.  "Dr.  Baity  told  us  that  the  course  they  had  at  Harvard,  a 
nine-month  course  with  a  thesis,  was  a  master  of  public  health;  without 
a  thesis  it  was  a  certificate  of  public  health,"  one  student  remembered. 
"Basically  [Chapel  Hill]  tried  to  jam  nine  months  of  class  work  without 
a  thesis  into  three  months.  We  went  to  school  all  day,  five  and  a  half 
days  a  week."  The  faculty  realized  the  program  was  too  intensive  and 
discussed  the  possibility  of  starting  a  nine-month  course.  Baity  and 
Rosenau  favored  the  plan,  but  State  Health  Officer  Carl  Reynolds  pro- 
tested, saying  it  would  be  too  difficult  for  health  departments  to  send 
people  for  that  length  of  time. '° 

Dr.  Rosenau  initially  found  office  space  in  Caldwell  Hall,  home  of 
the  Medical  School,  but  the  influx  of  faculty  and  students  into  public 
health  quickly  depleted  available  space.  Medical  School  Dean  Charles 
Mangum  persuaded  President  Graham  to  ask  the  state  legislature  for 
funds  for  a  new  building.  The  legislature  appropriated  $226,000  in  1937, 
but  that  fell  far  short  of  the  amount  needed.  Graham  then  asked  a 
committee  to  prepare  a  proposal  for  the  Public  Works  Administration 
(PWA).  Funds  had  dried  up  for  PWA  projects,  but  Graham  thought  that 
the  federal  government's  "interest  in  medical  science  and  public  health" 
might  persuade  the  agency.^' 

The  committee's  proposal  to  the  PWA  highlighted  the  Souths 
acute  health  needs.  Among  these  were  the  nation's  highest  infant  and 
maternal  death  rates,  as  well  as  "shameful  morbidity  and  mortality  rates 
due  to  nutritional  deficiencies."  The  proposal  also  pointed  to  the  univer- 
sity's many  efforts  to  eradicate  these  problems:  the  Institute  for  Research 
in  Social  Sciences,  a  division  of  social  work  and  public  welfare,  and  a 
division  of  public  health.  The  lack  of  a  proper  building  to  house  the 
Medical  School  and  Division  of  Public  Health,  the  proposal  concluded, 
handicapped  the  functioning  and  expansion  of  both  programs.  '^ 

Members  of  the  university  community  used  their  considerable 
influence  in  Washington  to  speed  along  the  review  process  and  ultimately 
win  approval  for  the  proposal.  H.  G.  Baity  first  wrote  to  Raymond 
Rosenberger,  a  friend  on  the  PWA  staff  and  a  Chapel  Hill  alumnus. 


31 


A  child  suffering  from 
rickets,  one  of  the  many 
nutritional  diseases  afflict- 
ing   southerners    in    the 
1930s  and  1940s. 


asking  him  to  "assume  the  personal  responsibility  of  steering  this  appli- 
cation through  the  proper  examining  channels."  Once  the  PWA  staff 
passed  on  the  application,  the  "next  battle  [was]  to  secure  an  allotment 
of  funds."  Baity  wrote  to  Dr.  Rosenau  suggesting  he  contact  friends  in 
the  Public  Health  Service,  such  as  Surgeon  General  Thomas  Parran. 
"Since  the  greatest  social  appeal  can  be  made  in  the  name  of  public 
health,"  Baity  said,  "such  expression  would  have  the  greatest  weight 
with  the  allocating  agency."  These  efforts  apparently  paid  off,  for  Parran 
wrote  a  strong  letter  on  behalf  of  the  application  and  it  won  approval.'^ 

Rosenau  achieved  much  in  his  first  two  years  at  Chapel  Hill.  The 
university  remained  a  strong  moral,  if  not  financial,  supporter  of  the 
program.  Under  Title  VI  of  the  Social  Security  Act,  the  Public  Health 
Service  continued  to  provide  a  substantial  portion  of  the  division's 
money.  The  students  seemed  enthusiastic  about  their  classes.  But  public 
health  remained  a  poor  cousin  to  its  academic  neighbors,  and  the  North 
Carolina  program  paled  in  comparison  to  its  counterparts  at  Harvard 
and  The  Johns  Hopkins.  Short  courses  for  public  health  practitioners 
were  valuable  endeavors,  but  until  the  division  could  begin  granting 
advanced  degrees,  its  scope  remained  limited  and  the  enterprise  lacked 
a  secure  future.  Rosenau  sought  to  remedy  that  situation  by  asking  the 
administration  to  allow  the  division  to  confer  baccalaureate,  master's, 
and  doctoral  degrees  in  addition  to  certificates.  The  Graduate  School 


32 


Dr.  Harold  Brown  joined  the  faculty  in 
1937  and  served  as  dean  of  the  school  from 

'  1941-43. 


°^[It]  looks  as 
though  we  are 
developing 
into  a  real 
School  of 
Public 
Health. 
That's  the 
dream  and  I 
believe 
before  long 
[it]  will  be  a 
fait  accompli^ 


M.  J.  Rosenau 


33 


approved  the  move,  and  the  university  administration  acknowledged 
that  approval  as  the  first  step  in  creating  an  independent  School  of 
Public  Health.  14 

Continued  support  from  the  General  Assembly  and  President 
Graham  allowed  Rosenau  to  expand  his  staff.  Dr.  Harold  Brown  joined 
the  faculty  in  September,  1937,  with  probably  the  most  impressive  aca- 
demic credentials  of  anyone  in  the  field  of  public  health.  John  Larsh, 
who  came  later  to  Chapel  Hill  to  work  with  Brown,  explained.  "He 
had  more  degrees  than  anyone  I  ever  knew.  He  had  a  bachelor's  and  a 
master's  and  took  his  doctorate  in  science  at  Hopkins  just  as  I  did.  He 
went  from  Hopkins  to  Vanderbilt,  teaching  parasitology  [while]  he  got 
his  M.D.  Later  he  went  to  Harvard  and  got  a  Doctor  of  Public  Health. 
He  was  about  thirty-five  years  old  before  he  got  his  first  job,  down 
here."  Harold  Gotaas  joined  the  Department  of  Sanitary  Engineering 
that  same  year,  and  a  year  later  John  William  Roy  Norton  came  on 
board  as  professor  of  public  health  administration.  With  the  addition 
of  these  men,  Rosenau  felt  more  hopeful  about  the  future  of  the  enter- 


The  Medical  and  Public  Health  Building  (later  named  MacNider  Hall) 


34 


prise  in  Chapel  Hill.  "[I]t  looks  as  though  we  are  developing  into  a  real 
School  of  Public  Health.  That's  the  dream  and  I  believe  before  long  [it] 
will  be  a  fait  accompli."'' 

The  1939-40  academic  year  marked  a  watershed  for  public  health 
at  Chapel  Hill.  "We  are  testing  fate  on  a  higher  level,"  Rosenau  observed. 
First,  the  division  moved  into  the  new  Medical  and  Public  Health  Building 
(now  MacNider  Hall).  The  "fine  new  building  with  shiny  streamlined 
equipment"  greatly  impressed  Dr.  William  A.  Mcintosh  of  the  Rocke- 
feller Foundation.  "A  model  of  architectural  design,"  he  noted.  "Everyone 
who  went  through  the  building  seemed  to  be  impressed  with  the  fact 
that  much  had  been  realized  for  the  moderate  cost  involved  both  as  to 


Center,  Bailey  Webb,  Gene  Cornatzer,  and  Bill  Taylor,  students  in 
biochemistry.  For  many  years  public  health  had  a  strong  presence  in 
the  Medical  School.  Harold  Brown  and  later  John  Larsh  taught 
parasitology  to  students  at  UNC  and  Duke. 


35 


Disagreements  between  Dr.  Rosenau  (left)  and  Dr. 
MacNider  (right)  contributed  to  the  creation  of  an 
independent  School  of  Public  Health. 


the  Structure  itself  and  its  equipment."  The  division  also  offered  the  last 
short  course  that  fall  — the  last  of  the  kindergarten  stage,"  Rosenau  re- 
marked. Having  been  accepted  into  the  graduate  school,  the  division 
redesigned  its  curriculum  and  admitted  fourteen  graduate  students.'* 

Emil  Chanlett  entered  the  master's  program  in  sanitary  engineering 
that  year.  He  divided  his  time  between  chemistry  and  engineering  courses 
on  campus  (some  of  the  former  engineering  professors  still  taught  in 
the  math  department)  and  public  health  courses  in  the  new  building. 
In  those  days  the  distance  between  the  two  parts  of  campus  seemed 
imposing.  The  Medical  and  Public  Health  Building  "stood  out  there  by 
itself,"  Chanlett  remembered,  "almost  like  a  monument.  It  was  considered 
to  be  far  away  from  the  rest  of  the  campus."  Classroom  and  laboratory 
work  consumed  most  of  the  students'  time,  but  Chanlett  and  Buster 
Horton,  along  with  two  graduate  students  in  parasitology,  Bill  Taylor 
and  Thomas  Brooks,  managed  to  play  handball  every  day  and  get  over 
to  Kenan  Stadium  for  Saturday  football  games.''' 


36 


A  number  of  factors  contributed  to  the  decision  to  upgrade  the 
Division  of  Public  Health  to  a  school  in  1940,  but  most  important  was 
the  public  health  profession's  desire  for  independence.  The  General 
Education  Board  report  that  led  to  the  founding  of  The  Johns  Hopkins 
School  of  Hygiene  and  Public  Health  in  1916  contained  a  strong  rec- 
ommendation that  public  health  programs  remain  independent  from 
medical  schools,  with  their  own  faculties  and  budgets.  The  independent 
program  at  The  Hopkins  became  the  standard  for  other  programs.  Dur- 
ing Rosenau's  years  at  Harvard,  medicine  and  public  health  were  closely 
associated,  with  the  Medical  School  being  the  more  dominant  power. 
The  small  size  of  the  initial  endeavor  at  Chapel  Hill  prevented  the 
formation  of  a  school  on  the  model  of  The  Hopkins,  but  Rosenau's 
strong  personality  and  Dean  Mangum's  commitment  to  the  program 
made  for  a  healthy  relationship.  As  the  division  grew,  however,  problems 
emerged.  The  new  dean  of  the  Medical  School,  William  deB.  MacNider, 
became  impatient  with  what  he  saw  as  a  conflict  between  the  relative 
autonomy  of  the  Division  of  Public  Health  and  his  responsibilities  as 
dean.  Rosenau  and  MacNider  maintained  a  formal  cordiality,  but  pri- 
vately they  did  not  see  eye  to  eye  on  matters  relating  to  the  division. 
Finally,  in  the  spring  of  1940,  the  public  health  faculty  petitioned  Presi- 
dent Graham  for  a  change  in  the  status  of  the  Division  of  Public  Health 
to  the  School  of  Public  Health.  Graham  and  the  Board  of  Trustees 
approved  the  petition  on  June  7,  1940.'^ 

The  school  also  launched  its  first  major  research  project  at  that 
time.  Venereal  disease  had  always  been  a  major  concern  of  public  health 
officials.  But  society's  unwillingness  to  separate  medical  issues  from  moral 
concerns  prevented  significant  progress  in  eradicating  the  disease.  The 
campaign  against  VD  received  a  major  boost  in  1936  with  President 
Roosevelt's  appointment  of  Thomas  Parran,  Jr.,  as  surgeon  general.  As 
former  chief  of  the  Public  Health  Service's  Venereal  Disease  Division 
and  most  recently  New  York  state  health  commissioner,  Parran  advo- 
cated public  discussion  of  VD.  The  publication  of  Parran's  Shadow  on 
the  Land,  his  identification  of  VD  as  the  nation's  number  one  health 
problem,  the  passage  of  the  National  Venereal  Disease  Control  Act— all 
these  helped  change  public  attitudes  and  generate  a  commitment  to 
bringing  the  problem  under  control. '^ 

In  this  climate  of  increased  national  concern,  the  Z.  Smith  Reynolds 
Foundation  announced  in  December,  1937,  that  income  from  its  $7 
million  endowment  would  go  to  the  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health 


37 


Dr.  Carl  Reynolds  accepting  from  Richard  Reynolds  a  check  that  established  a  major  venereal  disease  control  program 
in  North  Carolina. 


to  develop  a  VD  control  program.  Z.  Smith  Reynolds,  the  youngest 
son  of  Winston-Salem  tobacco  manufacturer  R.  J.  Reynolds,  had  died 
mysteriously  in  1933,  and  his  siblings  established  the  foundation  as  a 
memorial.  Mary  Reynolds  Babcock,  Smith's  sister,  had  strong  ties  to  the 
American  Social  Hygiene  Association,  and  she  apparently  directed  the 
foundation's  interest  toward  VD.  The  $100,000  the  foundation  allocated 
in  the  first  year  provided  the  stimulus  for  a  campaign  by  the  State 
Board  of  Health  that  lasted  through  1946.^° 

The  school's  involvement  in  the  campaign  began  a  few  years  later 
when  the  State  Board  of  Health  allocated  $17,500  for  a  professor  of 
syphilogy  and  a  staff  to  conduct  research  on  venereal  diseases.  The 
school  conducted  a  national  search  and  selected  Dr.  William  A.  Fleming 
for  the  professorship.  With  a  B.A.  and  M.D.  from  Vanderbilt  University, 
where  his  father  was  a  well-known  southern  historian,  Fleming  had 
gone  on  to  The  Johns  Hopkins  to  study  and  conduct  research  on 
syphilis.^' 

Shortly  after  Fleming  came  on  board,  the  Rockefeller  Foundation 
contributed  additional  funds  for  a  major  epidemiological  study  of  VD. 
The  school  selected  Dr.  John  Wright,  an  M.D.  from  Vanderbilt  Uni- 


38 


versity  and  a  recent  M.P.H.  from  The  Johns  Hopkins,  to  head  the  project. 
Initially  the  study  targeted  the  Orange-Person-Chatham  County  Health 
District,  but  Wright  soon  realized  the  need  to  include  a  more  urban 
area  and  added  the  Durham  City-County  Health  Department.  The 
project's  goals  included  establishing  the  prevalence  of  syphilis  in  the 
area,  gathering  data  to  determine  incident  rates  and  trends,  identifying 
the  contacts  of  infected  people,  and  developing  programs  to  treat  the 
afflicted.  Wright  and  his  staff  used  a  number  of  innovative  techniques. 
They  collected  data  from  a  variety  of  sources  and  entered  it  on  McBee 
keysort  cards  for  analysis,  the  first  application  of  computer  technology 
at  the  school.  Film  strips  provided  an  alternative  method  of  instruction 
for  patients,  and  recordings  of  nurse-patient  interviews  helped  train 
public  health  nurses.  ^^ 

These  efforts  to  control  and  eradicate  VD  increased  the  demand 
for  public  health  nurses  and  soon  led  to  the  establishment  of  the  De- 
partment of  Public  Health  Nursing.  Nurses  played  a  key  role  in  the 
delivery  of  health  care  to  the  public,  but  from  the  beginning  they  had 
been  excluded  from  schools  of  public  health.  Nurses  in  North  Carolina 
expressed  great  interest  in  public  health  training  when  the  division 
opened  in  1936,  and  the  North  Carolina  State  Nurses'  Association  asked 
the  university  to  develop  a  program  in  public  health  nursing.  Rosenau 


A  public  health  nurse  in  New  Bern,  North  Carolina,  gives  instructions  on  ways  to 
eradicate  rats. 


39 


recognized  the  need  for  such  a  program  but  said  he  lacked  the  personnel 
and  resources  to  make  it  possible.  By  1940  the  addition  of  new  faculty 
and  the  support  of  the  State  Board  of  Health  changed  all  that.-^^ 

In  that  year  State  Health  Officer  Carl  Reynolds  requested  an  out- 
line for  a  course  in  public  health  nursing.  The  School  of  Public  Health 
submitted  a  plan  that  drew  on  existing  faculty  and  called  for  the  addi- 
tion of  two  professors.  Reynolds  sent  the  proposal  to  the  Public  Health 
Service  and  the  Children's  Bureau,  a  branch  of  the  U.  S.  Department 
of  Labor  that  served  as  an  advocate  for  the  needs  of  children  and 
mothers.  Both  agencies  responded  favorably.  "We  believe  that  training 
for  public  health  nursing  should  be  an  integral  part  of  a  School  of 
Public  Health  and  with  our  setup  we  have  an  opportunity  to  establish 
this  useful  enterprise  on  a  plane  that  will  be  without  peer  anywhere," 
wrote  Rosenau.  "There  is  at  present  a  dearth  of  trained  nurses  for  public 
health  service,  and  a  career  in  this  field  opens  a  new  frontier  for  which 
there  will  be  a  growing  and  continuing  demand."^'* 

Among  the  people  suggested  to  head  a  Department  of  Public  Health 
Nursing  was  Ruth  Hay,  then  on  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  Cali- 
fornia at  Berkeley.  Writing  to  Dr.  Rosenau,  she  expressed  great  interest 
in  the  possibilities  at  Chapel  Hill.  "The  inclusion  of  training  of  all 
public  health  personnel  in  one  school,"  she  wrote,  "is  a  plan  that  I  have 
considered  for  some  time  as  an  ideal  set-up."  Rosenau  offered  her  the 
job.  Ruth  Hay  brought  many  years  of  experience  as  a  teacher  and  a 
practicing  public  health  nurse  to  the  job  at  Chapel  Hill.  A  native  of 
Ohio,  she  received  her  B.A.  from  Ohio  Wesleyan  University  and  her 
M.S.  from  Western  Reserve.  Since  1931  she  had  taught  public  health 
nursing  at  Vanderbilt,  Western  Reserve,  and  at  Berkeley.  She  recom- 
mended a  colleague  from  Berkeley,  Margaret  Blee,  to  fill  the  other 
position  in  the  department.  ^^ 

In  1942  the  presence  of  a  well-qualified  educator  provided  the 
stimulus  for  a  second  new  program.  In  the  fall  of  1941,  Dr.  Lucy  S. 
Morgan,  a  health  educator  with  the  Public  Health  Service,  joined  the 
staff  of  the  State  Board  of  Health  as  part  of  a  "lend-lease  program."  The 
daughter  of  Harcourt  A.  Morgan,  a  former  president  of  the  University 
of  Tennessee  and  at  the  time  chairman  of  the  Board  of  Directors  of  the 
Tennessee  Valley  Authority,  Lucy  Morgan  possessed  a  keen  awareness  of 
the  health  problems  of  the  South  and  a  great  deal  of  experience  in 
addressing  them.  Before  receiving  her  Ph.D.  in  public  health  from  Yale 


40 


Ruth  Hay  anJ  Margaret  Blee  shortly  after  they  began 
teaching  at  Chapel  Hill. 


in  1938,  Morgan  taught  school  and  worked  as  a  health  educator  in 
Tennessee.  After  graduating,  she  developed  a  community  health  educa- 
tion program  for  the  city  of  Hartford,  Connecticut.^^ 

Morgan  joined  the  Public  Health  Service  in  1941,  which  immedi- 
ately "loaned"  her  to  the  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health.  State 
Health  Officer  Carl  Reynolds  assigned  Dr.  Morgan  to  the  Cumberland 
County  Health  Department  in  Fayetteville  with  specific  instructions  to 
counter  the  increase  of  prostitution  around  Ft.  Bragg.  Wartime  created 
numerous  health  problems  for  towns  near  military  bases.  There  were 
housing  shortages,  a  constant  coming  and  going  of  civilians  and  soldiers, 
and  an  upsurge  in  venereal  disease.  Dr.  Morgan  applied  imaginative 
community-organizing  techniques  to  public  and  private  health  problems. 
By  working  through  local  black  and  white  women's  groups  and  relating 
the  educational  program  to  the  war  effort,  she  helped  rally  the  com- 


41 


Campaigns  designed  by 

health  educators  in 

North  Carolina  on  loan 

from  the  Public  Health 

Service. 

munity  around  issues  such  as  nutrition,  venereal  disease,  sanitation, 
and  tuberculosis.^^ 

Soon  more  Public  Health  Service  educators  arrived  in  North 
Carolina,  and  similar  programs  developed  in  other  cities.  The  success  of 
these  health  educators  spurred  Dr.  Reynolds  to  ask  the  School  of  Public 
Health  to  train  some  North  Carolinians.  The  State  Board  of  Health 
offered  fellowships  to  three  young  women,  and  in  the  fall  of  1942  they 
enrolled  at  Chapel  Hill.  At  the  same  time,  Dr.  Rosenau  requested  the 
services  of  Dr.  Morgan  to  develop  a  curriculum  in  health  education 
and  assist  with  the  instruction  of  students.  "We  have  already  made  a 
modest  start  in  Public  Health  Education,"  Harold  Brown  wrote  in  re- 
questing a  faculty  appointment  for  Lucy  Morgan,  "but  this  can  be 
greatly  augmented  and  made  outstanding  by  a  person  of  Dr.  Morgan's 
ability  and  experience."^^ 

Lucy  Morgan  produced  a  whirlwind  of  activity  wherever  she  went. 
Thanks  to  twenty  scholarships  from  the  W.  K.  Kellogg  Foundation,  the 
first  class  of  public  health  educators  had  twenty-five  students  in  the 
spring  of  1943.  Morgan  immediately  put  the  students  to  work,  with 
courses  ranging  from  malariology  to  public  speaking.  Like  nursing,  health 
education  had  a  somewhat  experimental  curriculum  for  the  first  few 
years.  For  instance.  Dr.  Morgan  initially  planned  field  training  for  the 
summer  months,  only  to  discover  that  vacations  and  the  weather  pre- 
vented quality  interaction  between  the  students  and  local  practitioners. 
The  next  year  the  students  took  their  training  in  the  spring  and  spent 
the  summer  taking  courses  in  Chapel  Hill.  Dr.  Morgan  did  not  limit 
the  students'  education  to  classroom  instruction  and  field  training.  She 


42 


instituted  a  speakers  series  that  brought  in  some  of  the  most  respected 
people  in  the  field  of  public  health.^' 

The  addition  of  departments  of  public  health  nursing  and  educa- 
tion had  not  been  part  of  Dr.  Rosenau's  original  plan  for  the  school. 
Like  the  men  who  guided  the  schools  at  The  Johns  Hopkins  and  Harvard, 
he  envisioned  a  more  scientific  orientation  for  the  program  at  Chapel 
Hill.  But  like  so  much  that  happened  over  the  next  fifty  years  at  the 
school,  demand  for  the  service  and  the  availability  of  resources  brought 
about  unintended  change.  The  two  new  departments  set  a  pattern  for 
the  future  in  another  way  as  well:  like  most  of  the  practice-oriented 
disciplines  that  would  eventually  be  included  in  the  curriculum,  public 
health  nursing  and  public  health  education  were  dominated  by  women. 
Dr.  Margery  Lord  had  broken  the  gender  barrier  as  a  student  in  1940, 
and  the  presence  of  Ruth  Hay,  Margaret  Blee,  Lucy  Morgan,  and  in 
1945  Eunice  Tyler  made  the  school  a  unique  enclave  of  female  academics 
on  the  Chapel  Hill  campus. 

Relationships  with  faculty  at  the  university  proved  difficult  for  the 
pioneer  women.  "They  thought  next  to  nothing  of  women,  "  Lucy 
Morgan  remembered,  "and  when  we  first  got  here,  we  weren't  allowed 
to  join  the  faculty  club  [even  though]  the  only  thing  they  did  was  go 
to  the  Carolina  Inn  for  lunch  and  maybe  they  told  jokes  they  thought 
we  couldn't  hear."  In  discussions  with  early  civil  rights  groups  Morgan 
used  to  pull  out  her  Men's  Faculty  Club  card  — after  they  let  women 
join— as  proof  that  she  belonged  to  "the  most  discriminated  group  in 
the  world— women."  "Even  at  Chapel  Hill,"  she  would  add,  "that  great 
liberal  institution."  The  situation  at  the  school,  however,  proved  quite 


43 


mi 


Troop  departures  in  Fayetteville  in  1942. 

different.  "There  was  no  question  with  Rosenau  [and  later  McGavran] 
about  women,"  Morgan  remembered.  "We  would  gather  in  Dr.  Rosenau's 
office  and  we  would  just  talk  over  whatever  it  was.  [Women]  were 
treated  exactly  alike,  your  opinions  were  asked.  We  had  a  democratic 
institution."^" 

Despite  the  success  of  nursing  and  health  education.  World  War  II 
imposed  severe  hardships  on  the  school.  The  armed  forces  and  the 
Public  Health  Service  needed  men  and  women  with  public  health  ex- 
perience, so  fewer  people  applied  to  the  graduate  programs.  In  addition, 
certain  members  of  the  faculty  felt  they  could  contribute  most  to  the 
war  effort  by  working  outside  the  university.  H.  G.  Baity  spent  part  of 
the  war  in  Brazil  working  for  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs 
(the  predecessor  of  the  Agency  for  International  Development),  Harold 
Gotaas  joined  the  same  organization  in  Washington  in  1942,  and  Roy 
Norton  left  for  the  army. 

Determined  not  to  let  the  school  founder,  Rosenau  began  looking 
for  students  to  fill  the  classes.  He  was  aided  in  this  effort  by  Dr.  Harold 
Brown,  who  was  appointed  dean  of  the  school  in  1941.  The  armed 
forces  provided  one  obvious  source  of  students,  and  the  School  of 
Public  Health  instituted  short-term  training  for  military  men  and  women. 
The  university  also  authorized  the  school  to  allow  undergraduates  with 
certain  prerequisites  to  take  their  fourth  year  at  the  school  and  receive 
a  B.S.  in  Public  Health.  Upon  entering  the  armed  forces,  these  grad- 
uates could  be  assigned  to  public  health  work.  Short  courses  for  public 


45 


health  nurses,  dentists,  sanitarians,  and  health  educators  filled  out  the 
schedule.^' 

During  the  war,  the  School  of  Public  Health  also  began  receiving 
students  from  outside  the  United  States.  The  International  Health 
Division  of  the  Rockefeller  Foundation,  the  Commonwealth  Fund,  and 
the  Pan  American  Sanitary  Bureau  each  made  scholarships  available, 
primarily  for  students  in  sanitary  engineering.  Luis  Mantilla  from  Lima, 
Peru,  and  Tarik  Bilginer  from  Istanbul,  Turkey,  were  the  first  students 
on  Rockefeller  fellowships  to  attend. 

Over  the  next  two  decades,  hundreds  of  foreign  students  would 
take  classes  and  receive  degrees  from  the  school.  Virtually  all  of  the 
faculty  during  that  time  would  serve  as  consultants  to  health  agencies 
in  developing  countries.  Dr.  Harold  Gotaas,  former  faculty  member  at 
the  school  and  later  president  of  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs, 
offered  an  explanation  for  this  development,  which  put  the  public 
health  movement  at  the  forefront  of  American  expansion  in  the 
postwar  world: 

The  activities  of  the  Inter-American  Cooperative  health  program 
directed  toward  the  control  and  reduction  of  infectious  diseases  and 
toward  the  elevation  of  health  standards  in  the  hemisphere  serve  in 
the  interest  of  economic  and  efficient  development  of  resources. 
With  this  development  will  come  purchasing  power  and  a  higher 
standard  of  living  which  are  necessary  bases  for  the  extension  of 
trade  and  the  support  of  commerce. 

Cooperative  public  health  had  already  proven  an  efficient  means 
for  cementing  friendship,  understanding,  and  cooperation  in  the 
hemisphere.  It  is  believed  that  public  health  will  continue  to  develop 
as  an  instrument  of  neighborly  friendship  and  for  the  demonstra- 
tion and  preservation  of  the  democratic  way  of  life.^^ 

The  comings  and  goings  of  faculty  and  students  became  common- 
place during  the  war.  Samuel  Hopper  and  Brewster  Snow  taught  sanitary 
engineering  for  a  period.  Dr.  John  Larsh  joined  the  faculty  in  1943. 
But  the  most  unsettling  departure  was  that  of  Dr.  Harold  Brown,  who 
resigned  as  dean  to  go  to  Columbia  University.  Rosenau  had  groomed 
Brown  as  his  replacement,  and  with  Brown's  promotion  to  the  deanship 
everything  seemed  to  be  in  place.  But  the  New  York  school  offered 
more  money  and  better  research  facilities.  Rosenau  reclaimed  the  title 
of  dean,  but  the  search  began  almost  immediately  for  a  replacement. 


46 


Elizabeth  L.  McMahan  {left) 
and  A.  Helen  Martikainen 
(right)  at  a  journal  club 
meeting.  McMahan  was  a 
student  and  later  a  faculty 
member  of  the  Department 
of  Public  Health  Education. 
Martikainen  was  director  of 
Health  Education  for  the 
State  Board  of  Health  before 
becoming  the  first  chief  of 
health  education  for  WHO. 


Students  from  outside  the  United  States,  like  these  health  educators  from  Puerto  Rico,  became  com- 
monplace at  the  school  during  the  1940s. 


47 


A  public  health  nurse  visits  the  home  of  a  family  in  South 
Carolina  in  the  1940s.  Training  these  front-line  practitioners 
was  an  important  part  of  the  School  of  Public  Health's 
mission  in  the  1940s. 


North  C^arolina  College  for  Negroes  President 
James  E.  Shepard 


48 


c: 


'Mr 


DOCTw..^  ■^^  THE 
iTlY  POI  ^""  ^C 


The  prospect  of  peace  buoyed  the  spirits  at  the  school  during  the 
spring  and  summer  of  1945,  and  the  staff  began  looking  expec- 
tantly toward  the  future.  Dr.  Rosenau  expressed  that  enthusiasm 
upon  his  return  for  the  fall  semester.  "I  am  just  back  after  a  bully  vaca- 
tion," he  wrote  a  friend,  "and  I  am  in  a  hot  spot  trying  to  hold  down 
the  lid.  Our  school  is  booming  and  prospects  are  glamorous."' 

The  world  had  changed  dramatically  during  the  previous  four  years. 
Fascist  movements  in  Germany,  Japan,  and  Italy  had  been  defeated;  the 
Soviet  Union  had  become  a  world  power;  and  the  nineteenth-century 
colonial  empire  had  come  apart.  The  United  States  had  emerged  from 
the  war  virtually  unscathed,  determined  to  play  a  leading  role  in  world 
affairs.  The  United  Nations  had  been  created,  along  with  agencies  such 
as  UNESCO,  UNICEF,  and  WHO. 

On  the  home  front,  the  federal  government  assumed  unprecedented 
responsibility  for  the  social  and  economic  life  of  the  country.  In  public 
health  the  pendulum  swung  even  further  away  from  private  funding,  as 
the  Public  Health  Service  took  over  many  of  the  functions  once  per- 
formed by  philanthropy.  Congress  considered  legislation  on  national 
health  insurance  and  federal  support  for  the  nation's  hospitals.  In  North 
Carolina,  medical  educators  and  politicians  debated  the  merits  of  a 
four-year  medical  school  at  Chapel  Hill  and  an  expanded  system  of 
hospitals  for  the  state. 

The  School  of  Public  Health's  first  postwar  initiative  involved  the 
creation  of  a  Department  of  Health  Education  at  the  North  Carolina 
College  for  Negroes  (NCC)  in  nearby  Durham.  Chartered  in  1910  as  the 
National  Religious  Training  School  and  Chautauqua  under  the  leader- 
ship of  Dr.  James  E.  Shepard,  NCC  had  become  one  of  the  nation's 


49 


outstanding  black  colleges  by  the  1940s.  After  meeting  Dr.  Rosenau, 
Shepard  wrote  the  General  Education  Board  about  the  need  for  "trained 
health  personnel.  .  .for  the  Negro  people"  and  his  idea  for  establishing 
a  school  of  public  health  for  blacks  at  NCC.  The  board  took  preliminary 
steps  in  that  direction  by  supporting  a  summer  institute  for  teachers 
and  health  workers  and  later  establishing  a  student  health  service  at 
the  college.  But  Shepard  pressed  for  at  least  a  graduate  program  in 
health  education.  Finally,  with  Rosenau's  support,  Dr.  Lucy  Morgan 
agreed  to  assess  the  feasibility  of  such  a  program.^ 

When  the  Mississippi  State  Board  of  Health  asked  the  School  of 
Public  Health  to  train  eight  black  students  in  1945,  Shepard  and  Rosenau 
decided  to  go  ahead  with  the  program  at  NCC.  A  curriculum  modeled 
after  the  one  at  Chapel  Hill  quickly  took  shape,  with  UNC  professors 
providing  the  instruction.  "They  were  willing  to  teach,"  Lucy  Morgan 
remembered,  "and  it  paid  nothing  but  a  pittance,  but  they  went  over 


The  first  public  health  education  class,  North  Carolina  College  for  Negroes,  1945-46. 


50 


and  taught  the  same  classes  that  they  did  at  Chapel  Hill."  John  Larsh, 
for  instance,  taught  his  introductory  course,  "Parasitism  in  Human  Dis- 
ease." "They  were  very  good  students,"  he  recalled.  "Howard  Barnhill, 
[Howard]  Fitts,  were  very  eager."  Gradually  students  trained  at  NCC 
took  over  some  of  the  teaching  responsibilities.^ 

The  Department  of  Public  Health  Nursing  assisted  in  a  similar 
program  beginning  in  1946.  North  Carolina  College  had  a  nursing 
program,  so  Ruth  Hay  and  Margaret  Blee  served  as  consultants  and 
taught  courses  in  public  health  nursing.  The  program  continued  until 
1956,  and  Chapel  Hill  professors  taught  a  course  in  public  health 
nursing  at  NCC  until  1963.'' 

Dr.  E.  W.  McHenry  of  the  School  of  Hygiene  at  the  University  of 
Toronto  visited  a  class  at  NCC  in  the  spring  of  1946.  "The  ten  persons 
in  the  class,"  he  reported,  "gave  a  very  fine  impression.  .  .  .  This  project 
to  provide  well-trained  health  educators  is  one  of  the  most  hopeful 
undertakings  I  have  seen  in  the  South''^ 

The  black  community  certainly  needed  health  educators,  as  well 
as  doctors,  hospitals,  and  health  facilities  of  all  kinds.  Life  expectancy 
was  much  lower  for  blacks  than  whites,  and  infant  mortality  rates  were 
much  higher.  Nutritional  problems  abounded.  The  over  one  hundred 
health  educators  trained  at  NCC  between  1945  and  I960  could  not 
negate  the  years  of  neglect.  But  the  lessons  they  learned  and  applied  in 
their  local  communities  helped  gradually  to  improve  the  health  status 
of  the  black  population.^ 

The  program  at  NCC  was  a  progressive  step  in  other  ways.  Jim 
Crow  still  reigned  in  the  South,  even  in  Chapel  Hill,  the  bastion  of 
southern  progressivism.  There  was  little  effort  on  the  part  of  the  uni- 
versity or  its  faculty  to  reach  out  to  blacks.  "Public  health  was  upsetting 
the  hell  out  of  everything,"  John  Larsh  remembered.  "Those  people  in 
South  Building  [the  university  administration],  they  couldn't  understand. 
You  weren't  supposed  to  do  things  like  that.  It  was  frowned  upon.  But 
in  public  health  we've  always  believed  in  helping  people,  and  training 
people  to  get  out  there  and  do  things,  and  you  don't  do  that  by  being 
very  conservative."^ 

In  addition  to  providing  the  students  with  classroom  opportunities 
NCC  could  not  afford,  the  UNC-NCC  Department  of  Public  Health 
Education  promoted  interracial  cooperation  on  a  limited  scale.  Lucy 


51 


Milton  J.  Rosenau  with  public  health  education  students  shortly  before  his  death. 


52 


Morgan  recounted  the  efforts  to  bring  black  and  white  students  together. 
"They  had  to  be  introduced  to  each  other.  They  had  never  done  that 
before.  What  we  did  was  to  have  a  journal  club,  and  we  met  first  over 
there  [Durham]  and  then  over  at  Chapel  Hill.  At  that  time  you  were 
not  supposed  to  eat  with  blacks.  So  we  always  had  refreshments  at  the 
meetings.  We  sent  them  together  to  the  field,  and  then  we  had  open 
houses  when  the  people  came  in  from  the  field,  black  and  white  together. 
Then  it  got  bitter  for  a  while,  and  we  used  to  pull  down  the  shades 
sometimes  when  we  had  meetings  in  Chapel  Hill."^ 

Operating  within  the  framework  of  "separate  but  equal,"  these  efforts 
by  public  health  educators  highlighted  the  absurdity  of  the  Jim  Crow 
system.  Yet  at  the  same  time  the  program's  existence  shored  up  a  seg- 
regated system  of  higher  education  that  remained  blatantly  unequal. 
For  fifteen  years  NCC  maintained  a  separate  program.  Only  in  1960,  as 
the  civil  rights  movement  pressed  for  an  end  to  segregation,  did  the 
School  of  Public  Health  admit  its  first  black  students. 

As  the  school  began  tackling  some  of  the  many  health  problems 
that  faced  the  South  in  the  postwar  period,  it  lost  its  founding  director. 
On  April  9,  1946,  at  the  age  of  seventy-six,  Dr.  Rosenau  suffered  a 
heart  attack  and  died.  In  some  respects  Rosenau  died  at  the  height  of 
his  career.  Only  the  year  before,  he  had  been  elected  president  of  the 
American  Public  Health  Association,  the  final  (and  long  overdue)  tribute 
to  one  of  the  great  leaders  of  the  public  health  movement.  Dr.  Rosemary 
Kent,  a  student  in  Rosenau's  last  class  and  later  a  professor  at  the 
school,  recalled  the  dean's  last  day  in  the  classroom. 

Probably,  short  of  construction  blasts,  nothing  has  ever  rocked  the 
building  across  the  street  [MacNider  Building]  as  did  the  unaccus- 
tomed applause  from  the  auditorium  the  day  Rosenau  closed  the 
course  in  epidemiology  in  December  1945.  On,  on  and  on  it  thun- 
dered and  rolled.  Overcome  at  last.  Dr.  Rosenau  turned  to  the 
stairs  at  the  front  of  the  room  and  slowly,  quietly  started  down  the 
long  two  flights  to  his  office.  And  still  the  applause  followed  him 
every  step  of  the  way  and  could  be  heard  by  the  staff  on  the  ground 
floor  Only  then,  with  damp  eyes,  did  the  class  depart.  .  .  .  He  knew, 
as  did  somehow  the  students  upstairs,  that  he  had  just  delivered 
his  valedictory.' 

Rosenau's  death  created  many  problems  for  the  school  and  exposed 
the  fragility  of  the  enterprise.  Still,  the  transition  had  been  expected. 


53 


When  Harold  Brown  resigned  as  dean  in  1943,  Rosenau  had  begun 
searching  for  a  suitable  replacement.  He  and  Frank  Graham  seriously 
wooed  General  James  S.  Simmons,  chief  of  preventive  medicine  in  the 
office  of  the  surgeon  general.  A  native  North  Carolinian,  Simmons  liked 
the  idea  of  moving  to  Chapel  Hill  but  felt  he  was  too  old  to  set  to 
work  at  a  school  that  lacked  financial  security.  Harvard  also  desired  his 
services,  and  that  school's  endowment  and  the  promise  of  more  Rocke- 
feller money  enticed  him  to  Cambridge. '° 

After  Rosenau's  death,  John  Wright  and  H.  G.  Baity  assumed 
responsibility  for  running  the  school  and  looking  for  a  new  dean.  But 
in  the  meantime  there  was  much  work  to  be  done.  Returning  soldiers 
filled  the  classrooms,  and  replacements  had  to  be  found  for  the  staff 
members  who  did  not  return  after  the  war. 

The  school's  first  major  step  in  the  postwar  period  involved  the 
establishment  of  a  Department  of  Nutrition.  Dr.  Rosenau  had  begun 
the  plans  shortly  before  his  death.  "It  is  scarcely  an  overstatement,"  he  wrote 
the  General  Education  Board's  A.  R.  Mann,  "to  say  that  nutrition  is 
public  health  problem  number  one  in  the  southern  section  of  our 
country,  and  it  is  my  opinion  that  the  time  has  arrived  to  set  up  a 
Department  of  Nutrition  in  the  School  of  Public  Health."  The  decision 
by  the  Rockefeller  Foundation's  General  Education  Board  to  fund  such 
a  department  made  it  possible  for  Wright  and  Baity  to  bring  Rosenau's 
plans  to  fruition." 

The  school  hired  Dr.  A.  Hughes  Bryan  to  head  the  new  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Health  Nutrition.  The  son  of  a  sugar  chemist  with  the 
U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture,  Bryan  studied  chemistry  at  Harvard 
College  and  received  his  M.D.  at  Harvard  Medical  School.  He  taught 
and  did  research  at  the  University  of  Chicago  Medical  School  before 
joining  the  Public  Health  Service  during  the  war.  Dr.  Bryan's  most  im- 
mediate task  in  his  new  assignment  was  to  assemble  laboratory  equipment 
and  plan  renovations  for  his  new  home,  Building  C,  a  temporary  struc- 
ture located  on  the  north  side  of  MacNider  Hall.  ^^ 

Meanwhile,  the  search  for  a  dean  continued.  After  another  can- 
didate declined  an  offer  to  head  the  school,  H.  G.  Baity  issued  words 
of  warning  to  President  Graham  and  Chancellor  Robert  House.  The 
school's  poor  standing  relative  to  the  other  schools  of  public  health  was 
undermining  its  recruitment  efforts: 


54 


A.  Hughes  Bryan,  first 
^  hair  of  the  Department 
of  Public  Health  Nutrition, 
at  work  in  his  laboratory. 


All  of  our  eight  competitors  are  institutions  with  great  resources, 
stabilized  budgets,  excellent  existing  staffs,  adequate  physical  facilities 
and  good  salary  schedules  with  guaranteed  tenure  and  attractive 
retirement  allowances.  In  other  words,  they  are  going  concerns 
which  offer  promise  and  opportunity. 

Here  at  Chapel  Hill  we  can  offer  none  of  these  things  — only  hope 
for  the  future  and  an  abundant  opportunity  to  better  the  health  of 
our  southern  region.  We  have  no  stabilized  budget,  in  fact  no 
guarantee  of  existence  beyond  the  coming  year.  We  have  little 
existing  staff  left  to  inspire  newcomers.  We  have  a  low  salary  schedule, 
and  have  not  been  able  to  offer  tenure.  We  are  already  so  crowded 
in  our  physical  facilities.  .  .that  we  are  not  only  unable  to  accom- 
modate the  research  activities  of  new  staff  members .  .  . ,  but  we  are 
actually  unable  to  provide  office  space  for  the  people  we  are  trying 
to  employ. 

If  we  cannot  build  a  staff  of  first-rate  people  in  key  positions  it 
would  be  better,  I  think,  to  discontinue  the  school.'^ 

Not  long  after  that,  Baity  began  discussing  the  deanship  with  Dr. 
Edward  G.  McGavran,  head  of  the  Department  of  Public  Health  and 


55 


H.  G.  Baity,  Edward  G.  McGavran,  and  John  Wright  working  on  the  school's  annual  report 


Preventive  Medicine  at  the  University  of  Kansas  Medical  School.  The 
job  interested  McGavran,  but  like  the  other  candidates  he  found  the 
lack  of  state  funding  to  be  a  serious  obstacle.  After  much  discussion 
and  persuasion,  the  North  Carolina  General  Assembly  agreed  to  provide 
token  support  for  the  school,  the  university  allocated  a  limited  number 
of  tenure  positions,  and  the  Public  Health  Service  agreed  to  supplement 
the  new  dean's  salary.  In  April,  1947,  McGavran  accepted  the  univer- 
sity's offer.  Baity  was  ecstatic.  "I  cannot  begin  to  tell  you  how  happy  all 
of  us  are  [at]  the  news  that  you  have  really  decided  to  come  with  us  as 
dean.  .  .  .  At  long  last  I  feel  that  we  are  on  a  solid  fiscal  foundation  and 
are  in  position  to  establish  ourselves  among  the  leading  public  health 
institutions  in  the  country."''* 

Like  Rosenau,  McGavran  possessed  extensive  training  and  wide  ex- 
perience in  public  health.  McGavran  was  born  in  India,  where  his 
parents  were  missionaries.  An  aunt  who  lived  with  them  served  as  the 
town's  only  medical  doctor,  and  her  efforts  to  meet  the  almost 
unlimited  needs  of  the  community  influenced  his  decision  to  go  into 


56 


medicine  and  public  health.  The  family  returned  to  the  United  States 
and  settled  in  Indianapolis,  where  McGavran  attended  high  school 
and  college.  After  graduating  from  Harvard  Medical  School  in  1928, 
McGavran  spent  four  years  in  private  practice  before  returning  to  Har- 
vard to  earn  a  master  of  public  health  degree.  From  1934  to  1946  he 
served  as  a  public  health  officer,  first  as  director  of  the  county  health 
department  in  Hillside,  Michigan,  where  he  also  administered  the  Kellogg 
Foundation  project  in  field  training,  then  as  director  of  a  training  cen- 
ter in  West  Virginia,  and  finally  as  health  commissioner  of  St.  Louis 
County,  Missouri.  Shortly  before  taking  the  job  at  Chapel  Hill,  he  had 
joined  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  Kansas.  ^^ 

McGavran  saw  himself  primarily  as  an  administrator  whose  job 
was  to  create  an  atmosphere  where  faculty,  staff,  and  students  could 
work  and  learn  together.  He  described  his  philosophy  in  this  way: 

The  first  step  in  accomplishing  these  objectives  was  to  develop  an 
organizational  pattern  within  the  faculty  and  a  school  philosophy. 
This  was  done  by  weekly  formal  staff  meetings  of  the  entire  faculty 
with  a  carefully  prepared  agenda  and  subsequently  approved  minutes. 
All  policy  and  most  administrative  matters  were  discussed  in  detail 
with  the  entire  faculty  and  majority  vote  ruled.  Time  was  set  aside 
at  each  meeting  for  complete  informational  exchange  between  de- 
partments. Ad  hoc  committees  were  formed  and  appointed  to  study 
many  specific  problems,  with  the  eventual  development  of  standing 
committees  within  the  faculty.  The  most  desirable  time  of  the  week 
was  set  aside  for  these  staff  meetings;  and  neither  classes  nor  com- 
mitments were  permitted  on  Monday  afternoons.  These  were  strictly 
"Executive  Sessions'— no  holds  were  barred.  Full  expression  and  the 
privilege  of  dissension  were  encouraged. 

It  thus  became  evident  from  action  rather  than  by  word  alone  that 
the  new  administration  of  the  school  was  a  democratic  adminis- 
tration, informal,  but  firm  in  its  purpose:  to  operate  the  School  of 
Public  Health  as  a  team  of  professional  equals  who  would  determine 
policy,  instruct  the  dean,  and  back  him  wholeheartedly  in  carrying 
out  the  school's  wishes  and  desires.'* 

McGavran's  presence  had  an  immediate  impact  on  the  school.  By 
the  end  of  his  first  year,  nine  new  faculty  positions  had  been  created, 
and  the  budget  for  research  had  increased  from  $75,710  to  $230,710. 
Most  of  that  growth  came  from  two  sources:  the  Kellogg  Foundation's 
support  for  a  Department  of  Field  Training  and  the  Public  Health 


57 


58 


Service's  decision  to  move  its  Syphilis  Experimental  Laboratory  to  the 
school. 

Field  training  had  long  been  a  staple  of  public  health  education. 
At  the  school,  public  health  nurses  and  educators  conducted  field  work 
in  the  spring  quarter  as  part  of  their  degree  requirements.  But  soon 
after  McGavran's  arrival,  the  school  submitted  a  proposal  for  a  much  more 
ambitious  program  to  the  W.  K.  Kellogg  Foundation,  where  McGavran 
had  worked  earlier.  Field  training  was  crucial  to  McGavran's  evolving 
notion  of  public  health.  He  compared  it  to  the  clinical  portion  of 
medical  education;  to  him,  field  training  was  equivalent  to  bedside 
practice.  The  proposal  called  for  establishing  a  field  training  station  in 
the  Orange-Person-Chatham-Lee  District,  as  well  as  improving  local 
training  sites  throughout  the  South.  This  plan  included  short  courses, 
in-service  training,  supervised  field  experience,  apprenticeship  training, 
and  residency  training.  The  Kellogg  Foundation  provided  the  initial 
funds  for  the  program,  and  the  State  Board  of  Health  provided  addi- 
tional money  and  personnel.'^ 

Dr.  William  P.  Richardson  assumed  the  duties  of  head  of  the  De- 
partment of  Field  Training  on  July  1,  1948.  A  graduate  of  Wake  Forest 
College  and  the  Medical  College  of  Virginia,  Richardson  proved  an 
ideal  person  for  the  job.  He  had  rich  experience  as  a  local  health  officer 
(he  had  served  as  head  of  the  Orange-Person-Chatham  District  Health 
Department  from  1936  to  1944)  and  on  the  staff  of  the  State  Board  of 
Health.  In  addition,  the  Public  Health  Service  assigned  a  sanitary 
engineer  and  a  public  health  nurse  to  the  department.'^ 

The  school  also  became  the  site  of  the  principal  research  laboratory 
of  the  Venereal  Disease  Division  of  the  Public  Health  Service.  In  1945 
Dr.  William  L.  Fleming  resigned  as  director  of  the  Reynolds  Research 
Laboratory,  and  a  year  later  the  Z.  Smith  Reynolds  Foundation  with- 
drew its  funding  for  venereal  disease  research  in  order  to  increase  its 
contributions  to  Wake  Forest  College,  then  in  the  process  of  moving 
from  Wake  Forest  to  Winston-Salem.  Dr.  Harold  Magnuson  of  the  Public 
Health  Service  replaced  Fleming,  and  the  university,  the  State  Board  of 
Health,  and  the  Public  Health  Service  stepped  in  to  support  the  labora- 
tory. Meanwhile,  The  Johns  Hopkins  closed  its  Laboratory  of  Experimental 
Therapeutics,  and  the  Public  Health  Service  decided  to  relocate  some 
of  the  laboratory's  staff,  equipment,  and  functions  to  Chapel  Hill.  The 
university  agreed  to  construct  a  building  to  house  a  newly  designated 


59 


Orange  Person  Chatham^ 

DISTRSCT 
HEAITH  MPARTMENT 


■-m^ 


Public  health  educators  from 

the  North  Carolina  College  for 

Negroes  and  the  University  of 

North  Carolina  at  the  field 

training  center,  1946. 


Syphilis  Experimental  Laboratory.  The  closing  of  another  Public  Health 
Service  laboratory  in  1949  brought  additional  equipment  and  personnel 
to  Chapel  Hill.  While  the  Department  of  Experimental  Medicine's 
primary  concern  was  venereal  disease,  its  research  often  had  much 
broader  applications.  "We  find  ourselves  engaged  in  a  wide  variety  of 
projects,"  Magnuson  wrote  Dean  McGavran,  "involving  chemotherapy, 
antibiotic  therapy,  bacterial  metabolism  and  physiology,  protein  chemis- 
try, and  other  areas  that  lie  outside  a  narrowly  defined  venereal  disease 
field."i9 

There  was  much  excitement  over  all  the  changes  at  the  school, 
but  the  daily  demands  of  the  classroom,  the  laboratory,  and  the  field 
station  kept  everyone's  feet  on  the  ground.  The  school's  most  immediate 
problem  was  that  it  had  no  place  to  put  the  new  people  and  programs. 
In  a  plea  to  Chancellor  House  to  consider  a  new  public  health  building 
as  the  university's  number  one  priority,  McGavran  described  the  prob- 
lems. "One  department  is  housed  in  the  old  Water  Works  Building,  half- 
way across  the  campus.  Four  temporary  buildings  have  been  put  up 
and  are  full  to  overflowing.  .  .  .  Many  workers  are  crowded  into  a  single 


60 


•  9  "S-   !P^^  ■■  Will  (■ 


Many  of  the  school's  offices,  classrooms,  and  laboratories  were  outside  MacNider  Hall  in  the  1950s. 
Above,  the  Department  of  Health  Education's  office  in  the  old  Water  Works  building  on  the  main 
campus;  belou.;  the  temporary  buildings  to  the  north  of  MacNider. 


61 


62 


room  or  single  laboratory  meant  for  one  person."  Not  only  were  present 
operations  threatened,  but  the  future  of  the  school  as  well.  Without 
additional  space,  there  could  be  no  expansion  of  the  student  body,  no 
increase  in  foundation  and  federal  funding.  "The  era  of  health  interest 
and  public  support  is  here,"  the  dean  wrote  House,  "and  we  shall  either 
be  on  the  bandwagon  or  see  the  parade  go  by  with  other  southern 
institutions  taking  the  lead  in  public  health  development."^" 

The  school's  inability  to  secure  funds  for  a  new  building  would 
plague  McGavran  for  the  next  decade.  In  part,  the  difficulty  stemmed 
from  the  School  of  Public  Health's  multiple  commitments.  Was  the 
school's  primary  constituency  the  university,  the  state  of  North  Carolina, 
the  southeastern  region,  the  United  States,  or  the  foreign  countries 
that  increasingly  sought  its  help?  To  McGavran,  the  health  agencies 
that  supplied  student  scholarships  were  the  primary  constituents.  North 
Carolina's  State  Board  of  Health  was  one  of  these,  but  so  were  those  of 
other  southern  states,  foreign  countries,  and  various  federal  agencies. 
The  school  saw  itself  as  a  regional,  national,  and  international  center, 
but  unlike  The  Johns  Hopkins  and  Harvard  it  had  no  endowment  and 
so  depended  on  the  state  for  funds,  especially  for  physical  facilities.  But 
the  legislature  was  unwilling  to  use  scarce  resources  for  non-North 
Carolina  students.^' 

The  fact  that  the  rapid  growth  of  the  school  also  coincided  with  a 
major  expansion  of  medical  services  at  the  university  also  presented 
problems.  In  1944  Governor  J.  Melville  Broughton,  at  the  urging  of 
the  North  Carolina  Medical  Society,  appointed  a  commission  to  study 
the  hospital  and  health  needs  of  the  state.  North  Carolina's  dubious 
distinction  of  having  the  highest  rejection  rate  for  draftees  during  the 
war  prompted  the  decision,  but  it  was  also  part  of  a  nation-wide  effort 
to  increase  the  availability  of  hospitals.  The  commission  called  for  the 
establishment  of  a  four-year  medical  school  at  the  university,  the  building 
of  a  teaching  hospital  in  connection  with  the  medical  school,  and  the 
creation  of  hospitals  and  medical  centers  in  parts  of  the  state  with  in- 
adequate facilities.  Although  many  people  supported  the  commission's 
recommendations,  powerful  figures  in  the  legislature  and  the  medical 
community  opposed  all  or  part  of  the  report.  Some  felt  the  existing 
four-year  schools  at  Duke  University  in  Durham  and  Bowman  Gray 
Hospital  in  Winston-Salem  adequately  met  the  state's  needs.  Others 
argued  that  such  a  school  belonged  in  a  major  city,  rather  than  on  a 
college  campus.  Still  others  opposed  the  state-sponsored  proliferation  of 


63 


ITS  ALL  UP  TO  YOU 

(to  make  flolik  wmhajo.\m, 

Gooonm 


The  Good  Health  Campaign  was 
part  of  the  post-World  War  II  drive  to 
upgrade  medical  facilities  and  improve 
the  health  of  North  Carolinians.  The 
public  relations  effort,  as  represented 
by  this  song,  were  reminiscent  of  the 
State  Board  of  Health's  campaigns  in 
the  1910s  and  1920s.  Department  of 
Public  Health  Education  students 
Ralph  Boatman,  Maisie  Bookhardt, 
Mary-Elizabeth  Gruwell,  and  Harriet 
Hylton  Barr  work  on  campaign. 


64 


local  hospitals.  For  the  next  few  years  politicians,  university  officers, 
and  health  officials  debated  the  merits  of  the  plan.  In  the  end,  the 
advocates  of  the  North  Carolina  Medical  Care  Commission's  recom- 
mendations prevailed,  and  in  1947  the  General  Assembly  appropriated 
funds  which,  combined  with  federal  support  under  the  Hill-Burton  Act, 
allowed  for  the  building  of  a  hospital  at  Chapel  Hill  and  the  expansion 
of  the  Medical  School.  ^^ 

Within  a  few  years  of  these  decisions,  Chapel  Hill  had  become  a 
large  regional  medical  center.  The  university  added  the  Schools  of 
Dentistry  and  Nursing  and  established  a  Division  of  Health  Affairs  to 
coordinate  these  new  programs,  as  well  as  the  Schools  of  Medicine, 
Pharmacy,  and  Public  Health.  Dr.  McGavran  strongly  supported  bringing 
the  schools  together  in  one  administrative  unit,  hoping  that  such  a 
move  would  foster  cooperation  between  medicine  and  public  health.  He 
also  agreed  to  serve  as  acting  administrator  of  the  division  from  March, 
1949,  until  July,  1950.  In  his  absence,  John  Wright  served  as  acting  dean 
of  the  School  of  Public  Health.  Finally,  Dr.  Henry  Clark,  Jr.,  took  the 
assignment  as  head  of  the  division  and  McGavran  returned  to  the 
dean's  office." 

These  developments  generated  much  discussion  about  the  health 
needs  of  the  state's  citizens,  but  they  had  limited  impact  on  the  public 
health  movement.  The  trajectory  of  postwar  spending  on  health  in  the 
state  and  in  the  university  clearly  favored  the  medical  profession  and 
the  hospital  industry.  The  medical  profession's  ability  to  control  post- 
war spending  on  health  stemmed  in  part  from  public  health's  lack  of  a 
politically  powerful  constituency.  Although  efforts  to  eradicate  commu- 
nicable diseases,  preserve  clean  air  and  water,  and  dispose  of  wastes 
benefited  everyone,  politicians  often  viewed  public  health  as  a  welfare 
program  for  the  less  fortunate  members  of  the  society.  People  who  ben- 
efited most  visibly  from  public  health  services— blacks,  the  poor,  the 
elderly,  children  — had  little  clout  in  the  halls  of  power.  ^'* 

The  school  also  operated  in  a  very  different  political  environment 
from  that  of  the  early  days  of  the  public  health  movement.  In  the  past, 
philanthropical  foundations  viewed  a  healthy  population  as  good  for 
the  business  interests  they  represented.  Progressive  Era  and  New  Deal 
reformers  sought  to  provide  a  safety  net  for  those  who  lacked  access  to 
doctors  and  hospitals.  But  efforts  to  maintain  or  expand  New  Deal 
programs  met  stiff  opposition  after  the  war.  President  Harry  Truman's 
proposal  for  national  health  insurance  failed  in  Congress.  The  public 


65 


health  movement  appeared  at  loggerheads  with  the  conservative  drift  of 
the  country.  ^5 

Dean  McGavran  hoped  that  legislators  would  see  public  health  as 
an  alternative  to  national  health  insurance.  "It  takes  no  political  prophet," 
he  wrote,  "to  see  that  the  postwar  conservative  government  will  shy 
from  the  'radical'  medical  care  legislation  and  appropriations  but  cannot 
avoid  fulfillment  of  some  of  its  promises  by  public  health  and  hospital 
support  far  in  excess  of  anything  heretofore  proposed."  McGavran  was 
right  about  support  for  hospitals,  but  public  health  would  have  to  wait.^^ 

Despite  these  difficulties,  the  school  continued  to  sink  its  roots 
deeper  into  the  university  community  and  reach  out  to  the  people  of 
the  state.  "There  is  about  the  School  of  Public  Health  an  interesting 
atmosphere  of  confident  assurance,"  noted  an  official  of  the  Common- 
wealth Fund.  A  major  reason  for  this  buoyancy  was  the  creation  of 
new  departments  and  the  arrival  of  new  faculty  members  in  the  late 
1940s  and  early  1950s,  some  of  whom  would  play  major  roles  in  the 
future  of  the  school  and  the  university.  ^^ 

Dr.  Cecil  G.  Sheps  joined  the  faculty  as  associate  professor  of 
public  health  administration  in  the  fall  of  1947.  A  native  of  Winnipeg, 
Canada,  Sheps  received  his  M.D.  from  the  University  of  Manitoba  and 
his  M.P.H.  from  Yale  University.  His  parents  were  Jewish  socialists  from 
the  Ukraine,  who  immigrated  to  Canada  after  the  1905  revolution. 
Sheps  initially  considered  law  and  politics  as  the  proper  sphere  in  which 
to  fight  for  his  notions  of  social  justice,  but  a  lecture  on  the  triumphs 
of  public  health  convinced  him  otherwise.  "I  was  inspired  by  that  lec- 
ture," he  remembered,  "and  decided  that  I  would  go  into  medicine,  that 
I  could  achieve  my  social  objectives  through  medicine."  After  a  few 
years  of  general  practice,  a  stint  in  the  Canadian  Army,  and  a  job  in 
public  health  in  Saskatchewan,  Sheps  accepted  a  fellowship  to  study 
medical  care  administration  at  Yale.  From  there  he  ventured  to  Chapel 
Hill  to  teach  a  summer  session  in  epidemiology  and  biostatistics.  Sheps's 
army  experience  in  venereal  disease  control  attracted  the  attention  of 
John  Wright,  and  Wright  offered  Sheps  a  job.  Wright  and  Sheps  began 
sifting  through  the  data  collected  by  the  venereal  disease  project  and 
published  their  findings  in  a  number  of  papers. -^^ 

A  future  dean  of  the  school,  Dr.  Bernard  Greenberg,  joined  the 
faculty  as  chairman  of  the  newly  organized  Department  of  Biostatistics 
in  1949.  The  lack  of  such  a  department  had  marked  a  serious  weakness 


66 


^ 

Bernard  G.  Greenberg 


in  the  school's  curriculum.  Over  the  years  various  people  had  taught 
courses  in  biostatistics,  and  in  1945  the  school  began  the  search  for 
someone  to  head  a  department.  Greenberg  established  ties  to  the  school 
in  the  fall  of  1946,  taking  Dr.  Baity's  course  in  public  health  sanitation 
while  a  graduate  student  in  experimental  statistics  at  North  Carolina 
State  College  in  Raleigh.  ^^ 

Biostatistics  filled  a  critical  hole  in  the  school's  offerings,  but  it 
took  a  while  for  faculty  members  to  get  over  their  initial  skepticism 
about  its  relevance  for  their  work.  The  Department  of  Public  Health 
Nutrition  provided  Greenberg's  first  collaboration  on  a  project  studying 
the  relationship  between  the  physical  measurements  of  school  children 
and  their  diet.  Before  long,  statistical  methods  became  a  vital  tool  in 
public  health  investigations. 

The  school  established  a  Department  of  Maternal  and  Child  Health 
in  1950  with  funds  from  the  U.  S.  Department  of  Labor's  Children's 
Bureau.  Since  the  passage  of  the  SheppardTowner  Act  in  1921,  the 
Children's  Bureau  had  aided  programs  designed  to  reduce  maternal  and 
infant  mortality.  The  expansion  of  these  programs  in  the  postwar  era 
increased  the  demand  for  professionals  in  the  field.  Dean  McGavran 
selected  Dr.  Sidney  Shaw  Chipman  to  head  the  department.  A  Canadian 
by  birth,  Chipman  received  his  M.D  from  McGill  in  1928  and  his 
M.P.H.  from  Yale  in  1947.  The  maternal  and  child  health  team  consisted 
of  a  physician,  a  nurse,  and  a  medical  social  worker,  and  the  Children's 
Bureau  provided  funds  for  all  positions.  In  addition  to  Dr.  Chipman, 
Jean  Rebentisch  joined  the  department  in  1950  as  associate  professor  of 
maternal  and  child  health,  and  in  1953  Geraldine  Gourley  came  on 


67 


g«JjOi — 


i 

Sidney  Chipman 


board  as  associate  professor  of  medical  social  work.  The  department 
developed  a  curriculum  for  students  specializing  in  maternal  and  child 
health  and  more  generally  for  all  students  in  the  school.  ^° 

The  school  had  long  been  interested  in  providing  instruction  in 
mental  health  for  its  students,  but  lack  of  funds  limited  course  work  to 
a  few  lectures  by  visiting  instructors.  In  1952  a  grant  from  the  Public 
Health  Service  allowed  the  school  to  create  a  Department  of  Mental 
Health  and  to  hire  Dr.  Roger  Howell  as  its  head.  With  Dr.  Howell's 
arrival,  students  received  more  in-depth  instruction  in  this  area  of  growing 
concern.  Howell  also  began  developing  a  curriculum  to  train  adminis- 
trators for  mental  health  centers.^' 

By  1952,  all  of  the  present-day  departments  had  been  organized. 
Rosenau,  Baity,  and  McGavran  had  established  a  structure  that  fit  the 
mission  of  the  school  and  the  personalities  of  the  faculty.  McGavran 
now  had  a  tight-knit  team  of  professionals  ready  to  tackle  the  region's 
problems. 

McGavran  himself  did  much  to  create  the  sense  of  community 
that  characterized  the  school  in  those  days.  "I  liked  the  spirit  of  the 


68 


69 


whole  thing,"  Rebecca  Bryan,  a  student  and  later  faculty  member  at  the 
school,  recalled.  "The  very  first  week  we  were  here  the  McGavrans  had 
all  the  student  body  come  out  to  their  house  for  a  reception.  Very 
soon  after  that  they  began  inviting  us  in  smaller  groups  for  Boston  baked 
beans  and  brown  bread.  We  were  really  royally  entertained."  Members 
of  the  faculty  also  invited  students  to  their  homes.  "We  were  all  wet 
behind  the  ears,"  Bryan  recalled,  "so  it  was  exciting  and  interesting  to 
be  able  to  sit  down  and  share  with  somebody  else  what  was  going  on 
in  your  state."  ^^ 

Frances  Gust,  who  joined  the  staff  of  the  school  as  McGavran's 
administrative  assistant  in  1950,  saw  McGavran's  sociability  as  central 
to  his  leadership  style.  "The  students  would  marvel  that  Dr.  McGavran's 
memory  was  so  good  that  at  these  dinners  he  would  always  shake  hands 
and  call  the  students  by  name.  But  what  they  never  knew  was  that  he 
would  bring  in  a  list  of  who  would  be  there  Friday  evening.  We  would 
get  cards  and  if  we  could  find  a  picture,  we  would  put  a  picture  on  the 


\ 


F 


^ 


%' 


Picnic  at  the  McGavrans'  in  1953. 


70 


card,  and  if  not  we  would  describe  the  person.  He  played  with  these 
cards  in  advance  and  could  say  hello,  how  are  you,  and  how  are  the 
people  back  in  Abilene,  Texas.  We  always  chuckled  over  this,  but  we 
never  gave  away  his  secret."^^ 

The  school  accepted  increasing  numbers  of  students  from  foreign 
countries  in  the  1950s,  and  McGavran  wanted  to  establish  the  same 
sense  of  community  among  them.  For  many,  adjusting  to  life  in  small- 
town America  proved  as  difficult  as  the  course  work.  Dean  McGavran 
asked  Geraldine  Gourley  to  develop  an  orientation  program  for  these 
students.  "We  got  the  sponsoring  agencies  to  agree  to  the  students' 
coming  two  weeks  before  school  started,"  she  remembered.  "For  students 
who  needed  it,  we  set  up  English  classes.  We  had  people  who  came  in 
and  talked  to  them  and  we  had  social  things.  Then  we  had  field  trips 
and  went  all  over  the  state.  We  visited  farms,  sewage  disposal  systems, 
dairies,  schools,  and  health  departments.  They  knew  the  resources  of 
the  state  better  than  the  American  students.  They  were  much  better 
able  to  fit  into  the  academic  part  of  the  school.  They  had  this  time  to 
get  their  feet  on  the  ground."^'* 

The  highlight  of  this  orientation  program  occurred  in  1955,  when 
Zebulon,  a  town  of  about  fifteen  hundred,  hosted  foreign  students  from 
Chapel  Hill  for  a  weekend.  Civic  clubs  and  church  groups  joined  to- 
gether for  "THE  WORLD  IS  COMING  TO  ZEBULDN."  The  high 
school  band  and  majorettes  met  the  students  at  the  town  hall  on  Friday 
afternoon.  Banquets,  a  dance  at  the  high  school  gymnasium,  a  visit  to 
a  tobacco  auction,  and  Cokes  at  the  local  drug  store  highlighted  the 
weekend  activities.  "The  students  were  astonished,"  Gourley  recalled,  "at 
seeing  the  mayor  washing  dishes  and  the  head  of  the  health  department 
serving  with  an  apron  on.  One  of  the  things  that  surprised  them  the 
most  was  to  find  the  farmers  so  prosperous  and .  .  .  people  of  authority. 
In  many  of  their  cultures  farmers  were  very  poor."^' 

Lucy  Morgan  created  an  equally  strong  esprit  de  corps  among 
public  health  educators.  Public  Health  Education  remained  one  of  the 
largest  departments  throughout  the  1950s,  and  public  health  educators 
were  among  the  most  visible  members  of  the  school  for  many  years. 
The  philosophy  that  guided  health  educators  defies  simple  explanation. 
More  than  anyone  else,  Lucy  Morgan  provided  the  intellectual  and 
social  rationale  for  the  department,  but  other  faculty  members  and 
hundreds  of  students  also  left  their  mark.  The  first  issue  of  the  depart- 


71 


ment's  publication,  Health  Educators  at  Work,  defined  the  issues  as  the 
editors  Lucy  Morgan  and  Eunice  Tyler  saw  them.  Although  the  United 
States  was  the  healthiest  place  in  the  world  in  which  to  live,  serious 
health  problems  remained.  Medical  science  had  the  ability  to  alleviate 
much  of  the  suffering,  but  "ignorance,  apathy,  carelessness,  and  the 
high  cost  of  medical  care"  too  often  kept  scientific  advances  from  the 
people.  "Reducing  this  lag  is  one  of  the  chief  aims  of  health  education," 
Morgan  and  Tyler  explained.  "Preaching  the  gospel  of  health  is  more 
than  advocating  the  use  of  toothbrush  and  vitamin  chart;  it  is  more 
than  teaching  disease  prevention.  Health  education  implies  a  belief  in 
the  right  of  every  person  to  be  as  healthy  and  safe  as  science  plus  human 
endeavor  can  make  him  and  a  belief  in  the  necessity  for  informed 
opinion  to  gain  this  end."^* 

Morgan  and  her  colleagues  were  most  influenced  by  the  teachings 
of  Lucy's  father,  Harcourt  A.  Morgan,  and  the  well-known  public  health 
advocate  C.-E.  A.  Winslow.  Harcourt  Morgan  grew  up  and  received  his 
education  in  Canada  but  spent  most  of  his  life  in  the  southern  United 
States,  first  as  professor  of  entomology  and  horticulture  at  Louisiana 
State  University,  then  as  president  of  the  University  of  Tennessee,  and 
finally  as  chairman  of  the  Tennessee  Valley  Authority.  In  the  "Mooring 


Harcourt  A.  Morgan 


72 


C.-E.  A.  Winslow,  chairman  of  the 
Department  of  Public  Health  at  Yale 
University  School  of  Medicine. 
Winslow's  expansive  vision  of  public 
health,  and  especially  his  promotion 
of  the  role  of  education,  made  him  a 
popular  visitor  to  the  school. 


Eleanor  Roosevelt  addresses  faculty  and  students  in  1950.  The  school  had  the  benefit  of  numerous  presentations  by 
distinguished  visitors  over  the  years. 


73 


Don  Ashton  of  the  State  Board  of  Health  demonstrates  the  use  of  steel  rat  traps  as  part  of  a  twelve-week  short  course 
for  sanitarians,  directed  by  the  school's  Department  of  Field  Training,  1951. 


Lecture  Series,"  which  he  delivered  at  the  School  of  Public  Health  from 
1943  to  1950,  Harcourt  Morgan  elaborated  his  philosophy  of  the  inter- 
relationship among  minerals,  plants,  and  animals,  and  related  his  holistic 
interpretation  to  social  and  economic  as  well  as  scientific  problems.  ^^ 

Despite  the  energy  that  seemed  to  drive  the  school  in  the  early 
1950s,  significant  problems  remained.  The  school's  annual  report  for 
1951-52  listed  five  major  needs:  additional  personnel,  salary  increases,  a 
larger  operating  budget,  increased  support  from  federal  and  state  agencies, 
and  a  new  building.  Personnel  needs  included  administrative  staff  and 
teaching  assistants,  as  well  as  additional  faculty  to  meet  the  growing 
instructional  demands.  "Means  must  be  found  to  provide  more  'seconds 
in  command,'"  McGavran  noted.  "We  are  not  propagating  our  own 
species.  There  is  no  replacement  for  too  many  of  our  key  personnel." 
But  even  if  the  school  could  obtain  additional  faculty  positions,  low 
salaries  prohibited  the  hiring  of  first-rate  people,  and  there  was  a  danger 
that  present  staff  would  leave.  "Present  key  personnel  in  public  health 
are  not  getting  salaries  commensurate  with  others  of  similar  qualifica- 
tion, training,  and  experience  in  the  Division  of  Health  Affairs  and  are 


74 


far  below  the  'market  value'  necessary  to  fill  these  positions,"  McGavran 
complained.  Equally  pressing  was  the  lack  of  funds  to  support  the 
school's  expanding  off-campus  activities.  "It  should  be  borne  in  mind," 
McGavran  argued,  "that  research  in  public  health  is  largely  field  research, 
and  though  it  does  not  require  the  university  to  provide  expensive 
laboratory  space  and  facilities,  it  does  require  equipment,  secretarial 
help,  and  travel,  far  beyond  the  amount  necessary  for  research  conducted 
within  the  academic  walls  of  the  university.  The  'field'  is  the  laboratory 
and  the  bedside  for  public  health  research  and  teaching.  Failure  to  pro- 
vide or  effort  to  curtail  reaching  this  'field'  and  using  this  'field'  is  like 
locking  the  door  of  the  laboratory,  or  closing  the  hospital  and  clinics 
to  medical,  dental,  and  nursing  education."^^ 

By  the  early  1950s,  the  frustrations  associated  with  administering 
an  ever  more  diversified  school  and  trying  to  win  support  for  that 
school  in  an  increasingly  hostile  environment  propelled  McGavran  into 
the  role  of  public  health  evangelist.  Although  his  ideas  had  been  jelling 
for  some  years,  they  first  saw  print  in  1953  in  an  article  entitled  "What 
Is  Public  Health?"  At  the  time,  McGavran  declared,  no  clear  definition 
of  public  health  existed.  "If  this  be  true,"  he  said,  "it  is  no  wonder  that 
with  the  changing  times  there  continues  to  be  increased  misunderstanding 
of  public  health  by  the  organized  medical  profession;  that  there  is  apathy 
and  indifference  to  public  health  on  the  part  of  the  public  and  appro- 
priating bodies  of  government;  that  there  is  lack  of  direction  and  plan- 
ning among  public  health  workers  themselves;  and  that  the  recruitment 
and  training  of  public  health  personnel  lag  far  behind  the  needs  in 
every  county  and  clime."^' 

McGavran  dismissed  definitions  that  seemed  too  narrow— public 
health  is  preventive  medicine'— or  too  broad— 'public  health  is  the  well- 
being  of  the  people."  The  first  definition  intruded  too  often  on  the  pre- 
rogatives of  the  physician,  while  the  second  necessitated  knowledge 
beyond  the  possible  scope  of  a  public  health  practitioner.  McGavran 
insisted,  instead,  that  public  health  was  a  distinct  profession  with  a 
"distinct  body  of  knowledge  that  determines  our  competence  without 
limiting  our  objectives."  Expanding  the  medical  model,  he  identified  the 
community  as  the  patient  of  public  health,  and  the  diagnosis  and  treat- 
ment of  that  patient  as  the  profession's  goal.  According  to  McGavran, 
"Public  health  is,  then,  the  scientific  diagnosis  and  treatment  of  the 
body  politic."  He  described  how  this  self-understanding  affected  public 
health  practice: 


75 


Acceptance  of  this  answer  calls  for  a  democratic  team  of  professional 
equals.  ...  It  immediately  becomes  obvious  and  essential  that  many 
other  professions  with  many  other  skills  and  knowledges  must  be 
integrated  into  scientific  public  health  to  obtain  a  diagnosis  and 
plan  of  treatment  for  the  body  politic. 

To  diagnose  community  ills  we  must  have  knowledge  of  community 
economy— the  distinctive  skills  of  the  economist,  a  knowledge  of 
the  social  structure  of  the  community,  and  the  impact  upon  their 
health  practices  of  nutritional,   .  .  .of  recreational,  religious,  moral, 
and  ethical  patterns.  .  .  . 

We  must  have  knowledge  and  techniques  of  community  organiza- 
tion, of  the  power  structure  of  that  community,  of  the  political 
structure,  of  health  laws  and  regulations,  of  attitudes  that  determine 
acceptance  or  rejection  of  change  and  development.  We  must  have 
sophisticated  knowledge  of  education  and  educational  methods,  of 
mores  and  morals  that  affect  the  growth  and  development  of  com- 
munity consciousness  and  community  action. 

We  must  have  knowledge  of  community  measurements,  of  the 
demographic  characteristics  of  our  patient  — the  age,  sex,  racial  dis- 
tribution, and  the  intricate  ways  in  which  this  affects  our  patient's 
health;  the  biostatistical  techniques  of  collection  and  analysis  of  the 
data  that  can  determine  mass  phenomena  of  disease  and  health; 
the  geographical  base  that  determines  isolation,  transportation,  and 
resources. 

We  must  have  knowledge  of  sanitary  science,  the  technical  skills 
that  can  determine  oxygen  demand  or  biologic  balance  under  widely 
varying  circumstances.  We  must  know  the  epidemiology  of  our 
patient,  the  community,  and  develop  techniques  to  assess  the  symp- 
toms of  community  illness,  physical  or  mental.  .  .  . 

All  of  this  is  nothing  more  or  less  than  a  scientific  approach  to 
the  diagnosis  and  treatment  of  the  body  politic  — the  history,  the 
physical  examination,  the  tests,  the  analysis,  the  clinical  judgment, 
and  the  prescription  for  treatment. '^^ 

It  was  bad  enough  that  the  medical  profession,  political  leaders, 
and  the  general  public  misunderstood  the  role  of  public  health,  but 
McGavran  also  felt  that  the  school's  faculty  lacked  a  clear  sense  of  the 
movement's  purpose.  As  a  result  the  faculty  spent  the  better  part  of 
the  1953  winter  quarter  discussing  questions  relating  to  the  role  of  the 
school.  "Before  we  can  have  a  better  understanding  and  appreciation 
among  others,"  McGavran  told  his  colleagues,  "we  must  set  our  own 


76 


\H 


Dean  Edward  G.  McGavran 


house  in  order  and  have  a  better  understanding  and  appreciation  of 
public  health  ourselves."  McGavran  posed  the  following  questions  for 
the  faculty  to  consider.  "Are  we  a  profession  of  public  health  or  are  we 
only  a  correlation  of  other  professions,  functioning  in  an  indefinite 
area?  Is  there  a  body  of  knowledge,  a  discipline,  which  is  distinctly 
public  health?  Is  our  loyalty  primarily  to  public  health  or  to  the  basic 
profession  from  which  we  have  sprung?  Can  we  define  public  health?" 
In  general  the  faculty  agreed  that  public  health  had  some  common 
body  of  knowledge,  however  nebulous.  There  was  greater  disagreement 
over  the  issue  of  a  professional  identity,  with  most  wanting  to  maintain 
their  identities  as  doctors,  nurses,  engineers,  and  so  on.  But  in  the 
context  of  the  times,  McGavran  faced  an  uphill  battle.  The  conservatism 
of  the  late  1940s  and  1950s,  the  diversion  of  federal  funds  to  the  Korean 
war  effort,  and  the  increasing  focus  on  scientific  solutions  to  health 
problems  limited  the  impact  of  his  campaign. ■*' 

"The  Body  Politic"  became  the  rallying  cry  of  a  campaign  to  win 
respectability  for  public  health.  Before  his  retirement  in  1963,  and  after- 
ward, McGavran  spoke  to  many  groups  of  people,  and  his  speeches 
almost  always  included  a  variation  on  this  theme. 


77 


H.  Bradley  Wells  of  the  Department  of  Biostatistics 


78 


r^hapter  A 


AND  SOCIETY 


The  funding  crisis  in  public  health  began  to  abate  by  the  mid- 
1950s.  With  the  end  of  the  police  action  in  Korea,  the  federal 
_   _     government  once  again  channeled  funds  into  scientific  and 
medical  research.  In  the  five  short  years  between  1955  and  1960,  the 
National  Institutes  of  Health  (NIH)  budget  increased  from  $81  million 
to  $400  million.  The  successful  Soviet  launch  of  Sputnik  stimulated  the 
race  for  space  and  freed  even  more  money  for  science  and  education. 
John  Kennedy's  election  in  1960  focused  attention  on  the  problems  of 
the  developing  world,  and  public  health  forces  played  an  important 
role  in  new  society  programs  such  as  the  Peace  Corps,  the  Alliance  for 
Progress,  and  the  Agency  for  International  Development.' 

Frustrated  in  their  efforts  to  win  adequate  support  from  North 
Carolina  sources,  McGavran  and  his  team  set  their  sights  elsewhere  — 
on  other  states,  the  federal  government,  and  countries  in  the  developing 
world.  Not  everyone  on  the  faculty  shared  McGavrahs  community- 
oriented  philosophy  of  public  health.  But  they  were  all  ambitious,  for 
themselves  and  the  school,  and  a  spirit  of  reform  permeated  their  efforts. 

The  school's  first  major  venture  outside  the  United  States  involved 
assistance  in  establishing  a  sanitary  engineering  program  at  the  National 
University  of  Engineering  (UNI)  in  Lima,  Peru.  It  was  the  first  of  Dan 
Okun's  many  successful  educational  advisory  projects  for  the  school. 
Dr.  Daniel  A.  Okun,  who  would  establish  himself  as  one  of  the  uni- 
versity's most  dynamic  faculty  members  over  the  next  thirty  years, 
replaced  H.  G.  Baity  as  head  of  the  Department  of  Sanitary  Engineer- 
ing in  1955.  Born  in  Brooklyn,  New  York,  Okun  dated  his  interest  in 
engineering  to  the  time  his  father,  an  engineer  for  the  city,  took  him 


79 


Marvin  Granstrom  {jar  right)  at  the  National  University  of  Engineering,  Lima, 
Peru,  1956. 


underground  to  see  construction  of  the  giant  tunnel  that  would  bring 
water  to  New  York  City.  He  took  an  undergraduate  degree  in  civil 
engineering  at  Cooper  Union  and  a  master's  degree  at  California  Tech- 
nical Institute  before  joining  the  Public  Health  Service,  where  he  was 
introduced  to  the  field  of  public  health  in  a  series  of  lectures  by,  among 
others,  Dr.  Edward  McGavran.  A  stint  in  the  army  during  World  War  II 
took  him  to  Latin  America,  New  Guinea,  and  the  Philippines  where 
he  was  exposed  to  the  problems  of  the  developing  world.  After  the  war, 
he  studied  with  Gordon  Fair  at  Harvard  University,  earning  an  Sc.D. 
in  1948.  Okun  worked  for  an  engineering  firm  for  a  few  years  before 
coming  to  Chapel  Hill  as  a  temporary  replacement  for  Baity.  Baity, 
who  had  taken  a  leave  in  1952  to  work  as  the  first  director  of  environ- 
mental health  for  the  World  Health  Organization  (WHO)  in  Geneva, 
decided  to  stay  in  Switzerland,  and  Okun  found  teaching  to  his  liking.- 


80 


Peru's  water  supply  and  waste  disposal  systems  had  not  kept  pace 
with  urban  and  industrial  growth.  Less  than  20  percent  of  the  popula- 
tion received  water  from  public  supplies,  and  only  a  few  larger  cities 
had  sewerage  systems  for  human  wastes.  As  a  result,  thousands  of  people 
suffered  from  diseases  associated  with  contaminated  food  and  water, 
such  as  typhoid,  infectious  hepatitis,  hookworm,  and  dysentery.  Ulti- 
mately, a  massive  program  of  education  and  public  works  would  be 
necessary  to  control  these  problems.  But  before  that  could  happen, 
Peru  needed  a  trained  core  of  sanitary  engineers  and  related  professionals. 
In  the  past,  most  of  the  country's  sanitary  engineers  had  received  grad- 
uate training  at  North  American  universities,  including  the  University 
of  North  Carolina.  In  1940  Peru's  National  University  of  Engineering 
inaugurated  an  undergraduate  degree  program,  but  it  was  inadequate 
for  the  country's  needs.  One  problem,  according  to  Okun,  was  the  lack 
of  a  "responsible  core  of  full-time  faculty."  The  UNI  asked  the  Interna- 
tional Cooperation  Administration-Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs 
for  technical  assistance.  The  Administration-Institute,  in  turn,  asked 
UNC's  Department  of  Sanitary  Engineering  "to  design,  equip  and  supply 
laboratories,  train  personnel,  assist  in  teaching  procedures,  set  up 
extension  courses  and  establish  research."^ 

Dan  Okun,  Emil  Chanlett,  Marvin  Granstrom,  and  Gilbert  Kelso 
each  spent  a  semester  in  Peru,  while  Ed  McGavran,  John  Wright,  and 


^ 

l"^-^? 

^^:^, 


.■.■V;:i-:^iroV^:S3i;E: 


^ 


Dean  McGavran  displays 
a  rainbow  trout  he  caught 
in  Lake  Titicaca  while 
on  a  trip  to  Peru. 


81 


John  Larsh  went  for  shorter  periods  to  help  with  their  specialties.  Dr. 
Charles  M.  Weiss  joined  the  department  as  a  replacement  for  the  faculty 
member  stationed  in  Peru.  Although  the  project  was  designed  to  last 
for  only  three  years,  a  short  period  of  time  in  which  to  launch  an 
educational  program,  Okun  felt  the  project  accomplished  most  of  its 
goals.  The  Peru  project  also  proved  valuable  to  the  school's  faculty. 
"They  learned  that  the  introduction  of  United  States  techniques  alone 
is  not  enough.  There  must  be  a  sympathetic  discernment  of  the  con- 
ditions and  the  customs,  the  patterns  and  the  problems,  the  prides  and 
the  prejudices  before  sound  progress  can  be  made.""* 

The  Department  of  Public  Health  Education  also  undertook  a 
project  far  away  from  the  Chapel  Hill  campus.  In  1955  the  department 
contracted  with  the  Public  Health  Service  to  develop  a  multipurpose 
health  education  training  program  focused  on  the  needs  of  American 
Indians.  The  health  problems  of  native  Americans  were  quite  serious  at 
the  time,  with  many  suffering  from  diseases  long  under  control  among 
other  parts  of  the  population.  The  project  targeted  western  New  Mexico 


Indian  mothers  and  children  in  New  Mexico  who  benefited  from  the  health  education  programs 
designed  by  the  School  of  Public  Health  staff. 


82 


Health  teaching  in  a  Koranic  school  in  Iran. 


One  of  Lucy  Morgan's  efforts  to 

"widen  the  circle"  of  understanding 

was  her  work  as  a  consultant  for 

the  World  Health  Organization. 

Here,  she  is  in  Tehran,  Iran,  in  1956 

with  Akbar  Moarefi,  who  received 

a  Ph.D.  from  the  school. 


83 


and  southwestern  Colorado.  Pueblo  tribes  predominated,  but  the  area 
also  sustained  Zuni,  Apache,  Ute,  and  Navaho  peoples.  Dr.  Vaughn 
Smith  served  as  the  project's  first  director  and  was  later  replaced  by 
Elta  Mae  Mast.  Smith  and  Mast  worked  to  develop  health  education 
programs  on  the  reservations  and  to  recruit  and  train  community  health 
workers  who  would  stay  on  after  the  project  ended.  Faculty  members 
provided  on-site  consultation,  but  among  the  project's  most  valuable 
resources  were  the  foreign  students  who  did  their  field  training  in  the 
area.  Their  assignment  to  the  project  reflected  the  faculty's  belief  that 
the  health  problems  facing  American  Indians  closely  resembled  those  in 
the  students'  native  lands.  ^ 

Projects  such  as  those  in  Peru  and  the  Southwest— and  there  were 
many  similar  ones  over  the  years  — helped  the  school  realize  its  commit- 
ment to  better  the  health  of  all  the  world's  peoples.  Although  it  is 
difficult  to  measure  the  impact  of  such  short-term  training  programs  on 
the  health  of  local  populations,  health  education  efforts  among  the 
Zuni  Indian  population  produced  some  demonstrable  results.  Diarrhea 
was  a  major  health  problem,  particularly  among  the  newborn.  In  1958 
seven  infants  died  of  diarrhea.  Health  workers  among  the  Zuni,  along 
with  School  of  Public  Health  students,  devised  an  educational  program 
for  mothers,  and  the  next  year  there  were  no  deaths  from  the  disease.* 

But  the  very  success  of  these  projects  began  to  undermine  the 
unity  that  McGavran  had  tried  so  hard  to  create  within  the  school. 
Individual  departments  had  always  had  their  own  character  and  concerns, 
but  the  small  size  of  the  faculty  and  McGavran's  insistence  on  the  team 
concept  had  mitigated  differences  among  them.  By  the  mid-1950s,  how- 
ever, a  perceptible  tension  between  solidarity  and  individualism  had 
begun  to  emerge.  A  number  of  factors  contributed  to  this  development. 
First,  institutional  growth  naturally  made  it  more  difficult  to  maintain 
the  cohesion  of  the  earlier  times.  Second,  many  of  the  school's  faculty 
had  studied  at  Harvard  and  The  Johns  Hopkins,  where  strong  depart- 
ments were  the  rule,  and  they  felt  that  the  best  contribution  they  could 
make  was  to  build  their  own  departments  at  Chapel  Hill.  Finally,  the 
policies  of  federal  funding  agencies  encouraged  departmental  divisions. 
The  Public  Health  Service  and  the  National  Institutes  of  Health  provided 
adequate  categorical  funding,  which  differentiated  between  disciplines, 
but  very  little  funding  for  core  public  health  activities.  A  grant  might 
be  available  for  an  epidemiological  study  on  cancer,  but  rarely  did  the 
federal  government  provide  support  for  a  broad-based  study  of  cancer 


84 


Frances  Gust  served  as  Administrative  Assistant 
to  Dean  McGavran  from  1950  to  1963.  Her 
various  skills  as  an  administrator,  diplomat,  and 
advisor  contributed  greatly  to  the  successful 
development  of  the  school.  She  took  courses  to 
better  understand  the  school  and  the  faculty  and 
eventually  earned  an  M.P.H.  degree. 


85 


that  would  involve  the  entire  public  health  team.  These  patterns  in 
federal  spending  meant  that  there  was  considerable  money  for  scientific 
research  and  training  but  less  for  more  programmatic  endeavors. '' 

Despite  these  centrifugal  tendencies,  McGavran  fought  hard  to 
maintain  a  sense  of  camaraderie  at  the  school.  He  continued  his  practice 
of  having  the  faculty  meet  in  his  office  on  Mondays  for  lunch,  and 
during  the  football  season,  the  men  gathered  to  wager  a  dime  on  the 
weekend  games.  "He  felt  strongly  about  trying  to  create  this  integration," 
Hilton  Goulson  remembered,  "to  get  people  to  talk  across  departmental 
lines."  "He  promoted  this  sense  of  togetherness  and  friendliness  and  a 
kind  of  informality,"  Rebecca  Bryan  recalled,  "but  he  had  high  expecta- 
tions of  everyone,  and  there  was  no  playing  when  you  needed  to  be 
working."^ 

Biostatistics  was  one  department  that  grew  rapidly  during  the  late 
1950s  as  a  result  of  increased  federal  funding.  America's  fascination  with 
computers  created  a  demand  for  statistical  assistance  in  the  School  of 
Public  Health,  the  Medical  School,  and  the  Public  Health  Service  that 
quickly  outstripped  Bernie  Greenberg's  ability  to  supply.  During  his 
first  flush  of  success  in  the  early  1950s,  Greenberg  complained  that  "as 
additional  burdens  and  responsibilities  have  mounted  geometrically,  there 


Bernard  Greenberg  (center)  and  James  Grizzle  (right)  of  the  School  of  Public 
Health  consulting  with  George  Penick  of  the  Medical  School. 


86 


has  been  only  an  arithmetic  increase  in  funds  available  for  personnel." 
With  hard  money  from  the  state  in  short  supply,  Greenberg  had  to 
look  elsewhere.  For  most  of  the  decade,  training  grants  from  the  Public 
Health  Service  and  research  money  from  the  American  Public  Health 
Association  (APHA)  paid  the  salaries  of  Greenberg's  growing  staff.  The 
Public  Health  Service  training  grants  supported  fellows,  who  did  both 
research  and  teaching.' 

As  with  other  departments,  growth  only  increased  the  need  for 
more  space.  Biostatistics  started  out  in  the  annex  known  as  Public 
Health  Building  A  on  the  north  side  of  MacNider  Hall.  "Inadequate 
housing  and  limitations  in  physical  space  are  beyond  the  point  where 
they  are  merely  inconveniences,"  Greenberg  wrote  in  1951.  "At  the  present 
time  they  are  health  hazards.  Every  one  of  the  staff  suffered  an  undue 
number  of  colds  because  of  the  lack  of  floor  insulation,  poor  heating 
facilities,  and  drafts."  The  department  obtained  additional  space  in 
Annex  B  the  next  year,  and  the  APHA  project  found  offices  in  Miller 
Hall.  By  1960  Greenberg  reported  that  the  department  was  spread  out 
all  over  campus. '° 

In  September,  1956,  Biostatistics  undertook  its  largest  research 
project  to  date,  a  study  for  the  APHA  of  factors  influencing  physicians 
to  enter  public  health.  The  grant  allowed  Greenberg  to  hire  a  number 
of  research  associates,  including  Roy  Kuebler,  James  Grizzle,  and  Bradley 
Wells,  all  of  whom  later  joined  the  faculty. 

Although  research  activities  increased  during  the  1950s,  teaching 
and  service  remained  the  mainstay  of  the  school.  Devising  a  curriculum 
for  public  health  students  required  a  great  deal  of  discussion  and  ex- 
perimentation. During  the  Rosenau  years,  individual  faculty  members 
taught  courses  in  their  specialties,  while  visiting  instructors  filled  in  the 
gaps.  With  the  addition  of  new  departments  and  faculty  in  the  1940s, 
McGavran  pushed  for  a  core  curriculum.  All  M.P.H.  and  M.S.P.H.  stu- 
dents were  required  to  take  Epidemiology,  Public  Health  Administration, 
Public  Health  Statistics,  Parasitism  and  Human  Diseases,  Principles  of 
Sanitation,  and  Public  Health  Nursing.  In  1950  the  faculty  began  reeval- 
uating that  scheme.  For  two  years,  school  and  departmental  committees 
discussed  the  appropriate  body  of  knowledge  required  of  public  health 
practitioners.  By  1952  and  1953  a  revised  curriculum  was  in  place.  In- 
cluded were  PH102,  Principles  and  Practices  of  Public  Health,  and  PH103, 
Applied  Principles  and  Practices  of  Public  Health. 


87 


Q5"g 


H    I  O 


I 


c 


.._    _.-S-\*-'^ 


,^..XAl^_ 


-/ 


Rosemary  Kent  and  Elta  Mae  Mast  work  with  high  school  students  in  the  Schley 
community. 


For  the  field-oriented  staff,  PH103  "represented  the  peak  in  cur- 
riculum planning."  Dean  McGavran  described  the  course: 

All  departments  were  involved  in  this  project.  The  total  student 
body  was  enrolled  in  the  course  — all  the  faculty  were  participants 
and  the  total  staff  of  the  four  field  centers  within  a  fifty-mile  radius 
of  Chapel  Hill  became  the  "clinical  instructors."  One  day  a  week 
was  set  aside  for  this  course  from  7:00  a.m.  to  7:00  p.m.  Each  faculty 
member  took  four  or  five  students  in  his  (or  her)  car  and  went  to 
"his  community  patient."  .  .  .These  small  groups  "observed  the  patient" 
superficially  — they  gathered  "patient  opinion"  on  health  matters  — 
they  studied  the  record  — interviewed  official  and  voluntary  health 
and  related  agencies  and  individuals,  observed  schools,  factories, 
facilities,  and  activities  and  functions  of  health  departments  and 
other  agencies,  and  finally  picked  one  particular.  .  .area  for  study  in 
greater  depth. 

Although  the  students  and  faculty  seemed  to  benefit  from  this 
hands-on  learning,  it  was  expensive  and  time-consuming.  Soon  many 
faculty  members  lost  their  enthusiasm  and  the  course  was  phased  out. 
"But  it  was  a  superb  experiment,"  McGavran  remembered,  "and  for  two 
brief  years  the  School  of  Public  Health  demonstrated  to  students,  prac- 
titioners, and  ourselves  that  there  was  a  public  health  team."^' 


89 


This  team  concept  was  applied  more  effectively  when  done  volun- 
tarily. Maternal  and  child  health's  Geraldine  Gourley  remembered  that 
"during  those  times  we  did  a  lot  of  teaching  in  other  departments.  I 
taught  interviewing  in  public  health  nursing  and  education,  even  in 
biostatistics.  I  taught  health  problems  with  special  social  implications." 
This  kind  of  interdisciplinary  cooperation  extended  outside  the  class- 
room. "I  spent  a  lot  of  time  with  Roger  Howell  in  the  Department  of 
Mental  Health,"  Gourley  recalled.  "We  went  around  all  over  the  state 
with  workshops  for  social  workers,  nurses,  and  various  people  around 
mental  health  issues."'^ 

Epidemiology  had  been  one  of  the  original  departments  in  the 
school,  headed  first  by  Rosenau  and  then  by  McGavran.  But  adminis- 
trative responsibilities  left  little  time  for  teaching  or  research  by  either 
of  the  deans.  "The  result,"  McGavran  wrote  in  the  1953-54  annual 
report,  "is  that  this  department,  which  should  be  the  strongest  in  the 
School  of  Public  Health,  is  actually  the  weakest."  That  situation  began 
to  turn  around  in  1954  when  McGavran  obtained  funds  from  the  Public 
Health  Service  to  start  a  Chronic  Disease  Section,  for  which  he  hired 
Dr.  John  Cassel.  A  native  of  South  Africa,  Cassel  received  his  medical 


John  Casse 


90 


degree  at  the  University  of  Witwatersrand.  He  won  a  Rockefeller  Foun- 
dation fellowship  to  study  at  the  School  of  Public  Health  in  1952,  and 
after  receiving  his  M.P.H.  he  returned  to  South  Africa  to  work  as  a 
medical  officer  at  a  health  center.'^ 

Medical  science  had  made  such  strides  since  the  late  nineteenth 
century  that  by  1950  there  were  effective  cures  for  most  infectious  dis- 
eases. But  scientific  understanding  of  chronic  maladies  such  as  cancer, 
mental  illness,  and  heart  disease  was  still  rather  primitive,  and  investi- 
gations of  these  illnesses  dominated  the  medical  research  agenda.  Cassel's 
job  was  to  provide  instruction  in  the  treatment  of  cancer  and  other 
chronic  diseases  to  public  health  students  and  to  conduct  epidemiological 
research  on  such  ailments.  Cassel  quickly  established  a  reputation  as  an 
excellent  teacher  and  researcher  and  within  a  few  years  had  received 
attractive  offers  from  both  The  Johns  Hopkins  and  Harvard. '"* 

Epidemiology  grew  dramatically  in  1958  with  the  addition  of  three 
new  faculty  members  paid  by  training  grants  from  the  Public  Health 
Service  and  NIH.  McGavran  wanted  an  experienced,  well-known  person 
for  the  job  of  chairman  and,  through  John  Cassel,  contacted  Dr.  Sidney 
Kark.  Kark  was  professor  of  social,  preventive,  and  family  medicine  at 
the  University  of  Natal  in  South  Africa,  but  prior  to  his  academic 
appointment  had  had  extensive  experience  as  a  public  health  officer 
and  as  a  research  epidemiologist.  Kark  was  at  the  time  pursuing  a  job 
with  the  World  Health  Organization  (WHO),  but  McGavran  offered 
him  a  one-year  contract  to  help  direct  the  growth  and  reorganization  of 
the  department.  ^^ 

Kark  left  after  a  year  to  be  WHO  professor  of  public  health  and 
social  medicine  at  the  Hebrew  University  in  Jerusalem.  McGavran 
recommended  John  Cassel  as  Kark's  replacement.  A  few  years  later 
McGavran  wrote  to  Kark,  "I  am  sure  you  would  be  proud  to  see  how 
well  John  Cassel  has  continued  and  developed  your  good  work  here  in 
establishing  a  dynamic  Department  of  Epidemiology.  John  is  a  jewel 
and  is  gaining  more  and  more  national  recognition.  His  department  is 
stimulating  to  students  and  faculty  alike  and  intensely  loyal  to  John.  I 
think  we  have  a  new  and  fresh  approach  to  the  teaching  of  epidemiology 
which  is  going  to  make  its  mark."^^ 

That  fresh  approach  involved  a  focus  on  the  social  causes  of  dis- 
ease. Michel  Ibrahim,  another  future  dean,  came  to  study  at  the  school 
in  1960.  He  spent  one  year  in  biostatistics,  but  a  desire  to  use  his  medical 


91 


J 

n  c 

- — . — 

Emil  Chanlett  with  students  on  the  Program  and  Steering  Committee  in  1950.  Seated,  left  to  right:  Chanlett,  Barbara  Adams, 
Mary-Katherine  Rellahan,  Ruth  Richards.  Standing:  Wayne  Messick,  Alfred  Fletcher,  Eugene  Taylor,  Charles  Campbell. 


background  led  him  to  transfer  to  epidemiology.  Ibrahim  described  the 
insights  that  propelled  Cassel's  research  and  teaching:  "Most  of  medi- 
cine was  very  biologically  oriented.  We  thought  in  terms  of  germs  and 
degenerative  diseases.  He  advanced  the  theory  — he  did  not  invent  it, 
but  he  pushed  it  very  hard  — that  social  and  psychological  factors  affect 
people's  health.  [He  was  concerned  with]  cultural  values,  societal  values 
and  stress  and  how  they  related  to  illness."'^ 

While  biostatistics  and  epidemiology  flourished  in  the  1950s,  the 
Department  of  Mental  Health  hung  on  for  dear  life.  The  initial  funding 
from  the  Public  Health  Service  proved  inadequate  to  support  Dr.  Roger 
Howell,  the  department's  only  faculty  member,  on  a  full-time  basis,  so 
he  also  served  as  acting  director  of  the  Mental  Health  Section  of  the 
State  Board  of  Health.  Dr.  Howell  spent  many  hours  in  the  field,  work- 
ing with  local  agencies  and  talking  to  civic  groups  about  mental  health, 
a  new  and  sometimes  difficult  subject  for  Americans  in  the  1950s. 


92 


Howell  resigned  in  1957  to  accept  a  position  as  director  of  the 
Division  of  Preventive  Psychiatry  at  the  Lafayette  Clinic  in  Detroit, 
Michigan.  His  reasons  for  leaving  indicate  some  of  the  problems  the 
school  faced  in  those  years: 

Probably  the  greatest  reason  for  my  change  concerns  the  promise 
of  being  able  to  do  research.  Being  a  one-man  department,  with 
rather  demanding  administrative  responsibilities  as  well  as  teaching 
and  field  activities,  seems  to  make  impossible  any  consideration  of 
spending  time  on  research,  which  is  much  needed  in  the  field  of 
mental  health.  The  policy  of  having  to  obtain  outside  funds  to 
support  the  department,  and  to  make  possible  personnel  additions 
so  that  research  is  forthcoming,  is  rather  short-sighted  for  a  progressive 
university,  interested  in  advancing  the  body  of  knowledge  which 
will  bring  greater  happiness  and  health  to  the  people  of  its  state. '^ 

For  a  year  and  a  half  the  department  had  no  faculty  members.  Finally 
the  school  hired  Dr.  John  Filley  as  assistant  professor  and  head  in  the 
fall  of  1958. 


State  Health  Officer 
J.  Roy  Norton  with 
Dean  McGavran  in  1951. 
Norton  served  on  the 
faculty  in  the  late  1930s 
and  again  in  the  1960s. 
In  1963  he  was  president 
of  the  American  Public 
Health  Association. 


93 


Charles  M.  Cameron,  Jr. 


Robert  E.  Coker,  Jr. 


With  Cecil  Sheps's  resignation  in  1952  to  become  director  of  pro- 
gram planning  in  the  Division  of  Health  Affairs,  the  Department  of 
Public  Health  Administration  lost  its  most  dynamic  young  professor. 
John  Wright  and  a  series  of  visiting  professors  carried  on  for  the  next 
few  years,  but  most  of  Wright's  time  was  taken  up  with  his  responsibilities 
to  the  school,  the  university,  and  the  state.  In  1955  Dr.  Charles  M. 
Cameron,  Jr.,  joined  the  faculty.  Another  of  the  school's  Vanderbilt- 
trained  physicians,  Cameron  had  served  as  a  health  officer  in  Tennessee, 
as  a  commissioned  officer  in  the  Public  Health  Service,  and  with  the 
North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health.  In  1954  he  had  received  an 
M.P.H.  from  the  School  of  Public  Health.  Much  of  his  work  at  the 
State  Board  of  Health  and  at  the  school  dealt  with  accident  prevention. 
Dr.  Robert  E.  Coker,  Jr.,  came  on  board  a  few  years  later.  The  depart- 
ment focused  mostly  on  teaching  and  service,  and  by  the  end  of  the 
decade  the  three  professors  were  on  scores  of  boards  and  committees. 

The  Department  of  Public  Health  Nursing  continued  to  attract 
large  numbers  of  students  throughout  the  1950s.  Ruth  Hay  and  Margaret 
Blee  remained  the  mainstays  of  the  department,  both  as  teachers  and 
consultants.  In  1954  the  members  of  that  year's  class  in  public  health 
nursing  presented  a  portrait  of  Professor  Hay  to  the  school.  "It  is  hoped," 
the  students  wrote,  "that  the  portrait  may  be  an  inspiration  to  all  nurses 


94 


Margaret  Dolan 


in  the  field  of  public  health,  and  will  serve  as  a  constant  reminder  to 
us  in  fulfilling  the  challenge  Miss  Hay  had  instilled  in  us."^' 

In  1950  a  new  person  who  would  become  a  national  figure  in 
public  health  joined  the  department.  Margaret  Dolan  came  from  an  old 
North  Carolina  family  with  strong  ties  to  the  university.  She  received  a 
nursing  degree  from  Georgetown  University  and  served  for  a  number 
of  years  as  an  epidemiological  nurse,  first  with  the  Public  Health  Service 
and  then  with  the  Greensboro,  North  Carolina,  City  Health  Depart- 
ment. In  1944  she  returned  to  the  university  and  received  her  B.S. 
from  the  School  of  Public  Health  in  public  health  nursing.  She  also 
received  an  M.A.  from  Columbia  University  in  1953.  Margaret  Dolan 
had  an  immediate  impact,  both  as  a  teacher  and  as  an  ambassador  for 
the  school.  By  the  mid'1950s  she  served  on  boards  and  committees  of 
state  and  national  nursing  and  public  health  associations.  In  1959  she 
succeeded  Ruth  Hay  as  head  of  the  department.  ^° 

The  Department  of  Public  Health  Nutrition  grew  more  slowly 
during  the  1950s.  In  1949  Frances  MacKinnon,  a  nutritionist  and  dieti- 
tian with  rich  experience  in  public  health  practice  and  teaching,  joined 
the  faculty,  bringing  a  clinician's  perspective  to  the  department.  The 
next  year  the  department  enrolled  its  first  M.P.H.  students.  Rebecca 
Broach  Bryan  was  a  student  during  the  1951-52  academic  year.  Like  so 


95 


Frances  MacKinnon 


Faculty  and  students  in  the  Department  of  Public  Health 
Nutrition,  1958.  Rebecca  Broach  Bryan  is  third  from  left  in 
back  row.  Hughes  Bryan  is  far  right. 


96 


many  other  students  in  that  period,  she  brought  valuable  experience  as 
a  public  health  worker  to  the  classroom.  "I  had  a  feeling,"  she  remembered, 
"that  the  faculty  felt  they  were  learning  as  much  from  the  students  as 
we  were  from  them,  and  they  probably  were.  The  department  was  being 
funded  by  the  Children's  Bureau,  and  most  students  were  here  on  Chil- 
dren's Bureau  scholarships.  When  the  visiting  chiefs  from  Washington 
came,  we  were  a  part  of  the  thinking.  I  felt  I  had  my  thinking  stretched 
a  mile."2i 

The  Department  of  Public  Health  Nutrition's  strength  lay  in  teach- 
ing and  service,  but  Dr.  Hughes  Bryan  continued  to  do  both  laboratory 
and  field  research.  He  began  a  study  with  Dr.  Greenberg  in  the  early 
1950s  on  the  growth  of  school  age  children  and,  with  money  from  the 
Public  Health  Service,  expanded  the  project  in  1955  to  look  more  closely 
at  the  relation  of  diet  to  growth  patterns.  Like  other  members  of  the 
school,  Bryan  repeatedly  complained  that  the  lack  of  space  prevented 
him  from  undertaking  any  larger  research  projects. 

By  the  mid-1950s,  John  Larsh  had  become  something  of  a  senior 
citizen  in  the  school,  although  he  was  still  in  his  late  thirties.  His  repu- 
tation as  a  teacher  and  a  stickler  for  academic  excellence  won  him 
praise  from  his  students  and  colleagues.  Hilton  Goulson  came  to  the 
school  in  1952  from  Luther  College  in  Decorah,  Iowa,  one  of  a  long 
line  of  students  from  that  college  who  studied  with  Larsh.  "He  was  one 
of  the  most  amazing  teachers  that  I  have  ever  known,"  remembered 
Goulson.  "Completely  organized.  He  would  come  into  a  room  and  be 
ready  to  go,  no  notes,  just  a  piece  of  chalk.  He  would  start  writing  and 
talking  at  the  same  time,  so  you'd  have  to  get  that  knack  of  listening 
and  being  able  to  write  down  what  he  writes  on  the  board  and  hope 
the  lead  in  your  pencil  doesn't  break.  When  you  got  through  for  the 
day,  or  for  the  week,  or  for  the  semester  you  had  a  complete  outline  of 
the  subject."  "Teaching  was  my  number  one  love,"  Larsh  recalled.  "The 
idea  that  I  knew  something  that  I  could  pass  on  to  someone  else  was 
the  greatest  thrill  I  ever  had."^^ 

Although  Larsh  firmly  believed  in  the  primacy  of  teaching,  his 
ever-present  white  lab  coat  indicated  his  continuing  connection  to 
research.  Larsh's  research  concerned  Trichinella  spiralis,  the  agent  of 
trichinosis,  and  some  of  his  students  expanded  on  his  early  findings. 
"The  main  thrust  of  our  research  at  that  time  was  trichinella  paralysis 
in  the  white  mouse,"  Goulson  remembered.  Larsh  worked  closely  with 


97 


these  students.  "In  the  early  days  I'd  have  one  or  two  working  under 
me,  and  I  could  have  time  to  teach  them  some  techniques.  How  do 
you  estimate  the  number  of  worms  in  an  animal  you  have  infected? 
How  do  you  look  at  malaria  parasites  and  get  the  density?  I  had  a  policy 
that  everyone  who  finished  his  Ph.D.  would  publish  at  least  one  full- 
length  paper  in  which  only  his  name  was  on  it.  I  felt  that  was  the  way 
to  launch  somebody  into  research.  Go  through  all  the  facets,  show 
exactly  how  it  is  done.  You  get  the  data,  but  the  data  is  no  good  if 
you  don't  publish  it."^^ 

The  role  of  research  in  the  school  was  a  matter  of  contention  dur- 
ing the  whole  of  McGavran's  tenure  as  dean.  John  Larsh  remembered 
his  first  interview  after  McGavran  arrived  in  Chapel  Hill: 

I'll  never  forget  how  disappointed  I  was  with  him.  I  thought  I  would 
impress  him  with  how  much  research  I  had  got  done.  He  says, 
"Well,  if  you  want  to  do  it,  that's  all  right,  but  that's  not  helping 
the  school."  I  thought,  my  god,  if  research  doesn't  help  the  school, 
why  do  we  do  research?  He  didn't  clip  anybody's  wings,  it  was  just 
his  blunt  way  of  saying,  well,  I'm  not  interested  in  that.  I'm  inter- 
ested in  the  school  making  a  reputation  as  being  a  resource  for  the 
community. 

See,  Dr.  McGavran  was  a  dyed-in-the-wool  field  man.  Rosenau  had 
no  experience  out  in  the  field.  Rosenau  I  picture  as  more  of  an 
intramural  type.  He  wrote  his  famous  textbook,  he  was  a  researcher 
at  the  National  Hygienic  Laboratory,  and  he  taught.  But  he  did 
not  go  out  and  see  how  public  health  really  worked  out  in  the 
field,  but  that's  what  McGavran  did.^** 

Although  Larsh  was  more  committed  to  teaching  and  research  than  to 
field  work,  he  supported  McGavran's  notion  that  the  primary  respon- 
sibility of  a  school  of  public  health  was  to  train  practitioners.  "You  are 
not  trying  to  train  research  people,"  he  said,  "you  are  training  people 
that  know  the  value  of  research."^^ 

The  Department  of  Experimental  Medicine,  however,  was  one  area 
in  which  pure  research  held  sway.  In  looking  back,  McGavran  acknowl- 
edged the  department's  contributions  (not  the  least  of  which  were  the 
funds  it  received  from  the  Public  Health  Service)  but  felt  he  had  set  a 
dangerous  precedent.  The  department,  in  his  opinion,  "remained  an 
'institute  of  research'  housed  in  the  School  of  Public  Health  —  separate 
and  distinct  in  every  regard.  .  .  .  The  only  excuse  for  research  in  an  edu- 


98 


John  Larsh  and  Hilton  Goulson  working  with  students  in  the  Department  of  Parasitology. 


cational  institution,"  McGavran  wrote,  "is  that  it  becomes  part  of  the 
teaching  and  learning  process  and  not  an  end  in  itself;  that  it  enriches 
and  strengthens  education,  faculty  and  students  alike.  This  does  not 
(and  did  not)  happen  when  the  research  is  conducted  in  a  separate 
institute  — call  it  a  department  or  what  have  you.  This  research  institute 
is  the  'European  pattern,'  which  has  been  followed  by  too  many  insti- 
tutions in  this  country."^* 

Dan  Okun,  on  the  other  hand,  believed  that  "teaching  and  service 
is  best  done  when  built  on  a  research  foundation." 

In  the  early  days  of  the  school  there  was  no  research  going  on. 
McGavran  was  for  teaching,  improving  everybody.  My  feeling  has 
always  been  that  there  are  some  functions  that  could  be  better 
served  by  some  of  the  other  schools  [in  the  state].  We  shouldn't 
occupy  space  here  to  do  only  what  McGavran  wanted  to  do,  take 
someone  from  this  level  and  raise  them  to  that  level.  That  was  an 


99 


Daniel  Okun  presents  an  "honorary  degree"  from  the  Department  of  Sanitary 
Engineering  to  Marie-Therese  Francotte  for  her  support  of  her  husband, 
Francois,  while  a  student  at  the  school.  Attitudes  about  female  roles  varied 
widely  at  the  school  since  departments  were  largely  segregated  along  gender 
lines. 


academic  service  obligation,  but  one  that  could  be  met  by  other 
institutions.  We  had  big  fights  about  it  and  most  of  the  rest  of  the 
faculty  in  the  School  of  Public  Health  — when  I  came  here  — did  not 
agree  with  me.^^ 

In  any  case,  by  the  late  1950s,  federal  funding  policies  were  making 
McGavran's  priorities  increasingly  difficult  to  sustain.  Federal  research 
money  became  more  plentiful,  while  money  for  teaching  and  operating 
expenses  remained  in  short  supply.  The  school,  however,  did  receive  a 
needed  shot  in  the  arm  in  1958  with  the  passage  of  the  Hill-Rhodes 
Act.  The  bill  allocated  a  million  dollars  annually  to  the  nation's  eleven 
schools  of  public  health  based  on  the  number  of  federally  sponsored 
students  they  admitted.  Unfortunately,  Congress  did  not  appropriate 
money  until  the  next  year,  and  even  then  the  funds  did  not  cover  the 
cost  of  educating  the  students.  Nevertheless,  McGavran  called  it  a  "step 
in  the  right  direction."  "If  continued,"  he  said,  "it  will  assist  the  schools 
materially  in  improving  and  expanding  the  amount  and  caliber  of 
education  in  public  health."^^ 

The  people  of  North  Carolina  also  seemed  more  receptive  to  the 
school's  needs.  On  October  27,  1959,  voters  approved  a  bond  issue  for 


100 


Faculty  and  itatt  at  the  ground-breaking  ceremonies  tor  Rosenau  Hall,  February  6,  1961. 


capital  improvements  for  state  institutions  and  agencies,  which  included 
a  million  dollars  for  a  new  building  for  the  school.  School  of  Public 
Health  alumni  and  staff  played  an  important  role  in  securing  the  favor- 
able bond  vote  through  their  involvement  in  the  North  Carolina  Public 
Health  Association.  The  association  sent  letters  to  its  1200  members 
asking  them  to  promote  the  bond  in  their  communities.  The  associa- 
tion's successful  promotion  of  the  bond  drive  was  one  indication  of  the 
school's  growing  influence.  As  more  and  more  graduates  took  positions 
in  local  health  departments,  they  used  their  training  to  spread  the 
school's  philosophy  throughout  the  state.  ^' 

School  officials  appreciated  the  support  of  the  people  of  North 
Carolina,  but  a  million  dollars  was  far  short  of  the  needed  funds.  For- 
tunately, Congress  directed  construction  funds  under  the  Grant  and 
Research  Facilities  Act  to  the  Public  Health  Service,  which  in  turn 
provided  $700,000  in  matching  funds  to  the  school. ^° 

Ground-breaking  ceremonies  for  the  new  building  took  place  on 
January  16,  1961.  The  dean  posed  with  shovel  in  hand,  and  the  faculty 
and  staff  huddled  around  him  on  a  cold  and  snowy  day.  On  another 
cold  day  that  January,  President  John  F.  Kennedy,  enjoined  his  fellow 
Americans,  "Ask  not  what  your  country  can  do  for  you,  but  what  you 
can  do  for  your  country."  Kennedy's  rhetoric  of  self-sacrifice  resonated 


101 


deeply  with  those  who  had  already  devoted  themselves  to  furthering 
the  cause  of  public  health,  and  public  health  leaders  looked  forward  to 
help  from  the  new  administration. 

Kennedy's  domestic  policy,  as  it  turned  out,  offered  few  new  pro- 
posals on  health  care,  although  it  did  support  additional  money  for 
construction  of  health  facilities  and  scholarships.  The  thrust  of  his 
legislative  efforts  was  the  Democratic  Party's  continuing  fight  for  the 
addition  of  hospital  insurance  to  Social  Security.  In  May,  1961,  Dean 
McGavran  testified  before  the  U.  S.  House  of  Representatives  on  a  bill 
"to  expand  and  improve  community  services  and  facilities  for  the  health 
care  of  the  aged  and  chronically  ill."  McGavran  spoke  forcefully  for  the 
bill,  but  he  also  offered  two  amendments  on  behalf  of  the  American 
College  of  Preventive  Medicine  that  would  remove  the  ceilings  on  grants 
for  schools  of  public  health.  If  additional  funds  for  training  were  not 
also  made  available,  he  argued,  new  services  would  only  aggravate  the 
shortage  of  trained  personnel.^' 

The  construction  of  a  new  building  and  the  inauguration  of  a 
new  young  president  portended  a  new  era  at  the  school.  Soon  the  torch 
would  be  passed  to  a  new  generation.  Ruth  Hay  and  Margaret  Blee 
were  the  first  of  the  "old  guard"  to  retire.  In  1960  they  started  serving 
on  a  half-time  basis,  and  in  1962  took  full  retirement.  That  same  year 
Lucy  Morgan  turned  over  the  chair  in  public  health  education  to  Ralph 
Boatman.  Dean  McGavran  also  announced  his  retirement. 

Such  transitions  provide  institutions  with  an  opportunity  for  re- 
flection, and  the  school  cast  its  eye  backward  on  a  number  of  occasions 
in  the  early  1960s.  Dr.  Rosemary  Kent  undertook  a  history  of  the  school 
in  1962.  For  many  months  she  and  other  members  of  her  committee 
searched  the  university  archives,  examined  records  in  the  Dean's  Office, 
and  corresponded  with  old  friends  of  the  school.  The  eventual  publica- 
tion provided  only  a  sketch  of  the  early  years,  but  the  effort  generated 
great  interest  in  the  school's  past  and  preserved  many  important 
documents.  ^^ 

The  school  also  participated  in  a  university-wide  self-study  in 
1962.  The  report  presented  the  state  of  the  school  on  the  eve  of  Dean 
McGavran's  retirement.  Growth  was  the  key  word.  Enrollments  were  on 
the  rise.  Research  funds  were  increasing.  The  faculty  was  not  only  growing, 
but  salaries  and  benefits  were  beginning  to  catch  up  with  those  of 
other  schools. 


102 


Construction  of  the  new 
School  of  Public  Health 
building. 


Belou;  Retirement  dinner  for  Ruth  Hay 
and  Margaret  Blee  at  the  Carolina  Inn 
on  the  Chapel  Hill  campus.  School  of 
Public  Health  faculty  have  probably  eaten 
more  meals  per  capita  at  the  Carolina 
Inn  than  any  group  on  campus. 


103 


Brock  Chisholm,  former  director-general  of  the  World  Health  Organization,  discusses  international  health  issues  with 
Dean  McGavran,  Frank  Graham,  and  Lucy  Morgan. 

Any  academic  institution's  reputation  is  based  on  the  reputation  of 
its  individual  faculty  members.  Research  and  teaching  are  the  primary 
criteria  for  judging  an  individual's  standing  in  the  profession,  but  in  a 
service-oriented  field  like  public  health,  activities  outside  the  classroom 
and  the  laboratory  are  also  crucial  to  the  individual's  and  the  school's 
reputation.  From  working  with  local  schools  and  health  departments  to 
consulting  with  the  World  Health  Organization  in  various  parts  of  the 
world,  the  school's  staff  spent  thousands  of  hours  dealing  with  practical 
health  problems.  "This  leadership  role,"  the  self-study  committee  reported, 
"is  more  than  a  prestige  factor  in  the  School  of  Public  Health.  It  pro- 
vides for  better  student  recruitment  and  selection,  better  learning  and 
teaching  situations,  revitalization  of  research,  and  closer  correlation  with 
community  need  and  educational  effort.  Good  performance  here  is  to 
the  School  of  Public  Health  what  good  performance  in  patient  care  is 
to  the  Medical  School."" 

There  was  a  momentum  in  public  health  that  the  1963  self-study 
report  very  accurately  predicted.  The  committee  foresaw  growth  in  the 


104 


number  of  students  and  federal  money  and  in  the  diversity  of  educa- 
tional programs.  "In  all  these  things,"  the  committee  wrote,  "we  shall 
either  move  ahead  with  the  tide  or  be  left  behind  in  the  wash;  there  is 
no  halfway  alternative."  The  waves  of  the  future,  according  to  the  com- 
mittee, were  health  care,  environmental  health,  and  international  health. 
Who  or  what  determined  the  destiny  of  public  health,  the  committee 
did  not  say.  The  issue  was  not  why,  but  how.^"* 

The  development  of  new  programs  and  the  addition  of  more  faculty 
members  entailed  some  administrative  changes  that  ran  counter  to 
McGavran's  "town  meeting"  vision.  In  1952  an  Executive  Faculty  Com- 
mittee, made  up  mostly  of  department  heads,  replaced  the  general  faculty 
as  the  policy-making  body  of  the  school.  Then  in  1959  McGavran 
appointed  his  first  assistant  dean,  Dr.  Millard  Bethel.  Dean  McGavran, 
in  a  confidential  comment  included  in  his  "Report  to  the  Faculty,"  warned 
his  colleagues  about  the  consequences  of  continued  growth. 

None  of  the  faculty  will  probably  wish  to  change  the  democratic 
administrative  approach  to  the  organization  and  operation  of  the 
School  of  Public  Health,  but  the  change  may  come  anyway.  Increas- 
ingly in  the  past  year,  the  executive  faculty  had  insisted  upon  the 
Dean's  Office  assuming  more  and  more  of  the  functions  which  in 
past  years  have  been  carried  on  by  faculty  individuals  and  through 
committees.  These  have  been  called  administrative  details;  for  example, 
the  preparation  of  the  catalogs,  much  of  the  administrative  activity, 
and  scheduling  of  classes. 

Admittedly,  these  activities  are  time  consuming  functions  that  remove 
faculty  "from  departmental  activity,  from  important  teaching,  re- 
search, and  services,"  but  I  warn  you  that  you  can't  "have  your  cake 
and  eat  it."  The  incoming  dean  (as  I  would)  will  no  doubt  bow  to 
these  faculty  pressures  and  even  welcome  more  administrative  con- 
trol unhampered  by  the  democratic  process,  but  what  will  be  the 
net  result?  Be  sure  you  want  to  lose  control  before  you  dump  "chores." 
There  are  few  schools  with  faculties  that  have  the  responsibilities 
and  opportunities  to  guide  their  school  that  you  have  earned.  Re- 
sponsibilities with  subsequent  opportunities  are  easier  to  keep  than 
to  get.  ^5 

To  the  end  McGavran  tried  to  forge  the  unity  he  felt  was  necessary 
for  a  successful  public  health  team.  "One  of  the  last  things  he  did," 
Hilton  Goulson  recalled,  "and  one  that  I  remember  so  vividly,  was  to 
walk  through  the  entire  building  making  certain  that  there  were  no 


105 


William  Friday,  Abel  Wolman,  Dean  McGavran,  Henry  Clark,  and  Hugh  Holman. 


coffee  pots.  Coffee  pots  were  not  allowed  because  he  had  a  coffee  room 
down  on  the  first  floor,  and  everybody  was  supposed  to  come  down 
there  and  drink  coffee."  Soon  after  McGavran  left,  however,  the  room 
became  a  laboratory.  ^^ 

By  the  spring  of  1963,  the  School  of  Public  Health  had  much  to 
be  proud  of.  The  student-faculty  ratio  had  declined  dramatically,  state 
appropriations  had  increased  steadily,  and  research  funds  supported 
many  important  projects.  The  dedication  of  the  new  School  of  Public 
Health  Building  (the  building  was  not  officially  named  for  Dr.  Rosenau 
until  1965)  brought  hundreds  of  people  to  Chapel  Hill  for  two  days 
of  speeches,  discussion,  and  socializing.  Some  of  public  health's  most 
notable  personages  graced  the  stage  of  the  new  auditorium.  On  Saturday 
morning,  April  6,  1963,  Dr.  Abel  Wolman,  professor  emeritus  of  sani- 
tary engineering  at  The  Johns  Hopkins,  presented  the  opening  address. 
That  afternoon  four  group  sessions  discussed  the  past,  present,  and 
future  of  public  health.  A  speech  by  the  school's  most  senior  supporter, 
Frank  Porter  Graham,  highlighted  the  evening  activities.  On  Sunday 
morning  John  Wright  planted  a  southern  magnolia  in  memory  of  Milton 
J.  Rosenau,  and  that  afternoon  North  Carolina  Governor  Terry  Sanford 
dedicated  the  building.  The  future  seemed  so  promising  that  nostalgia 
for  the  past  was  fleeting.  Dr.  and  Mrs.  McGavran  were  headed  to  India; 
the  school  had  a  new  home  and  soon  would  have  a  new  dean.^'' 


106 


William  Friday,  president  of  the  University  of 
North  Carolina,  and  Ida  Friday,  a  former  student 
and  instructor  in  the  Department  of  Public  Health 
Education,  both  long-time  supporters  of  the 
school,  greet  Leila  Morgan  at  a  reception  during 
the  dedication. 


Frank  Porter  Graham 
and  Miss  Ruby  Ross,  Dr. 
Rosenau's  secretary,  ex- 
change greetings  at  the 
dedication  ceremonies. 


107 


108 


r^hapter 


CONFLICT  AND 
CHANGE 


The  1960s  was  among  the  most  tumultuous  decades  in  American 
history.  The  civil  rights  movement,  student  protests  against  the 
:  __     war  in  Vietnam,  and  women's  demands  for  equality  helped 
define  the  times.  The  assassination  of  President  John  F.  Kennedy  rocked 
the  nation  in  1963,  and  within  five  years  assassins'  bullets  had  killed 
Malcolm  X,  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  and  Robert  Kennedy.  Violence 
broke  out  in  urban  ghettos,  in  small  southern  towns,  and  on  college 
campuses,  as  the  struggle  for  justice  and  equality  tested  the  mettle  of 
the  nation.  In  an  effort  to  confront  some  of  the  republic's  more  obvious 
problems,  Congress  passed  civil  rights  laws  and  channeled  millions  of 
dollars  into  social  programs.  This  search  for  the  good  society  ended 
with  the  expansion  of  the  war  in  Vietnam  and  Richard  Nixon's  election 
in  1968. 

The  decade  represented  something  of  a  golden  age  for  the  public 
health  movement.  Medicare  and  Medicaid  were  the  centerpieces  of  Pres- 
ident Lyndon  Johnson's  "Great  Society"  programs.  But  smaller  measures 
also  left  their  mark.  Particular  programs  sought  to  increase  medical 
research,  reduce  barriers  to  health  care  for  the  poor,  develop  treatments 
for  chronic  diseases,  and  reduce  the  gap  between  scientific  knowledge 
and  available  health  care.  During  Johnson's  administration.  Congress 
passed  over  forty  pieces  of  health  care  legislation,  and  millions  of  dollars 
became  available  for  research  and  training.' 

At  the  School  of  Public  Health,  the  search  for  a  new  dean  began 
shortly  after  Dr.  McGavran  announced  his  retirement  in  1962.  A  search 
committee  chaired  by  John  Wright  considered  dozens  of  candidates. 
Many  were  unavailable  at  the  time,  and  philosophical  differences  among 
committee  members  eliminated  others  from  consideration.  In  the  end 


109 


:0 

K  _r~^___uv__ 

?  ^. 

■'■':,.        i 

^ 

.  ^.^j. 

-1  ^ 

^^^■ms  ^^^^^^^ 

1 

'■3~           :.$ 

A.iji^...jy 

f    ■ 

•  m^^: 

r 

[ 

^m^-- 

I   - 

Lte 

i 

m 

!?■  . 

S         , 

r 

j-       ' 
h 

h  ■ 

^€1 
Ipa 

J 

EV-an  W  illiam  Fred  Mayes 


the  committee  nominated  Dr.  William  Fred  Mayes,  a  choice  strongly 
supported  by  McGavran.^ 

Fred  Mayes  had  a  varied  background  as  a  public  health  teacher 
and  practitioner.  He  received  both  his  B.S.  and  M.D.  from  the  Univer- 
sity of  Kansas,  where  he  also  did  his  residency  in  pediatrics.  Mayes 
worked  as  a  local  and  state  health  officer  in  Kansas  before  taking  an 
M.P.H.  at  Harvard  in  1948.  After  that  he  served  as  health  director  for 
the  town  of  Brookline,  Massachusetts,  and  as  a  professor  at  the  Harvard 
School  of  Public  Health.  A  two-year  stint  as  a  U.S.  health  adviser  in 
Pakistan  preceded  his  move  to  Washington  to  join  the  Public  Health 
Service.  When  he  accepted  the  job  at  Chapel  Hill,  he  was  directing  the 
agency's  Division  of  Research  Grants  in  the  Bureau  of  State  Services.^ 

The  new  dean  barely  had  time  to  unpack  before  a  series  of  national 
and  international  events  intruded  on  the  quiet  village  of  Chapel  Hill. 
John  Kennedy's  assassination,  civil  rights  protests  along  Franklin  Street, 
and  the  speaker  ban  controversy  (an  attempted  legislative  mandate  to 
require  advance  approval  of  all  campus  speakers)  shook  the  university 
community.  More  profoundly  transformative,  however,  were  the  explosions 
of  knowledge  and  population  that  characterized  the  period,  and  both 
had  major  implications  for  public  health.  On  the  one  hand,  investments 
in  education  begun  in  the  1950s  paid  off  in  the  1960s  with  major  ad- 
vances in  the  biological,  physical,  and  social  sciences.  On  the  other,  the 
baby  boom  of  the  1940s  sent  student  enrollments  skyrocketing  while 


110 


the  rising  birthrates  in  underdeveloped  countries  presented  public 
health  professionals  with  new  challenges. 

The  School  of  Public  Health  grew  tremendously,  and  both  the 
administration  and  the  faculty  deserved  much  of  the  credit  for  its  success. 
But  dollars  from  Washington  and  Bethesda  (the  home  of  the  National 
Institutes  of  Health)  fired  the  engines  of  growth.  In  1962  the  school 
had  a  budget  of  almost  $2  million,  with  just  over  $1  million  coming 
from  the  Public  Health  Service.  By  1972  the  service  contributed  $3.5 
million  out  of  an  $8.3  million  budget.'' 

The  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering  set 
the  pace  in  the  1960s.  The  economic  boom  of  the  post-World  War  II 
years  provided  Americans  with  the  highest  standard  of  living  in  the 
world,  but  the  affluent  society  generated  many  potential  dangers  to  the 
environment  and  to  the  public's  health.  Chemicals,  radioactive  wastes, 
and  contaminated  water  were  just  a  few  of  the  by-products  of 
development. 

In  the  late  1950s,  Dan  Okun  acquired  funding  from  the  Public 
Health  Service  and  enlarged  the  department's  mission  to  include  the 
study  of  these  new  environmental  dangers.  Lyman  Ripperton  in  air 
hygiene,  David  Eraser  in  industrial  hygiene,  and  Donald  Johnson  in 
sanitary  chemistry  came  aboard,  bringing  their  expertise  in  these  new 
fields.  In  1962  the  department  changed  its  name  from  Sanitary  Engi- 
neering to  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering  and  organized  its 
courses  into  five  program  areas  to  allow  students  the  opportunity  for 
specialization:  sanitary  engineering  and  water  resources,  environmental 
chemistry  and  biology,  environmental  and  food  sanitation,  air  and  in- 
dustrial hygiene,  and  radiological  hygiene.  ^ 

Okun  and  his  colleagues  recognized  that  environmental  issues  in- 
creasingly demanded  interdisciplinary  research  and  teaching.  In  the  early 
1960s,  they  set  up  two  joint  training  programs  with  North  Carolina 
State  University.  The  Public  Health  Service  saw  merit  in  this  approach 
and  provided  funds  to  create  an  Institute  for  Environmental  Health 
Studies  (now  the  Institute  for  Environmental  Studies),  with  Okun  serving 
as  director.  The  institute  brought  together  faculty  from  the  Departments 
of  Biostatistics,  Botany,  Chemistry,  City  and  Regional  Planning,  Envi- 
ronmental Sciences  and  Engineering,  Epidemiology,  Geology,  and  Zoology 
at  Chapel  Hill,  along  with  the  Department  of  Food  Science  at  North 
Carolina  State.  Dr.  Stanley  Weidenkopf,  the  deputy  director,  oversaw 


111 


David  Fraser  instructs  a  student  in 
the  use  of  an  electron  microscope. 


Otto  White,  Jr.,  and  Harvey  Jeffries  prepare  experiments 
for  their  joint  technical  paper  in  the  M.S.P.H.  program. 


*s: 


'f^- 


^ 


v*SS«'" 


^^^^^ 


C 


Charles  Weiss  (center)  at  work  in  the  lab  with  graduate  students  Frank  Wilkes  (left)  and  Alan  Rubin  (right). 
112 


the  day-to-day  operations  of  the  institute,  which  prepared  pre-  and 
postdoctoral  students  for  careers  in  environmental  health.'^ 

The  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering  estab- 
lished a  quarterly  newsletter,  ESE  Notes,  to  communicate  the  results  of 
its  expanding  research  program.  ESE  Notes  featured  short,  technical 
articles  about  ongoing  projects,  as  well  as  reports  on  student  and  faculty 
activities.  Early  titles  included  "Ozone  in  the  Atmosphere  Over  the 
Southern  Appalachians,"  "Biological  Monitoring  of  Exposure  to  how 
Level  Air  Pollution,"  and  "Phosphate  Concentrations  and  Marine  Algal 
Ecology."^ 

The  department's  expansion  can  be  attributed  to  a  number  of 
factors.  It  had  an  illustrious  history,  going  back  to  the  early  1920s 
under  the  nationally  known  engineer  Thorndike  Saville,  and  continuing 
in  the  1930s  and  1940s  as  H.  G.  Baity  established  a  worldwide  reputa- 
tion as  a  teacher  and  a  sanitary  engineer.  Dan  Okun  built  on  this 
foundation  by  widening  the  scope  of  the  department's  research  and 
teaching,  hiring  excellent  faculty,  and  recruiting  good  students.  The 
department  was  in  a  perfect  position  to  ride  the  wave  of  concern  for 
environmental  issues  that  appeared  in  the  1960s. 

The  Department  of  Biostatistics  also  grew  rapidly  in  the  1960s. 
Here  too,  the  presence  of  an  ambitious,  nationally  known  chair  and  an 
expanding  federal  budget  contributed  to  the  department's  success.  Bernard 
G.  Greenberg  began  building  the  Biostatistics  Department  in  the  late 
1950s  with  government  and  foundation  money,  most  of  which  went  to 
research.  Although  Greenberg  and  his  colleagues  did  a  great  deal  of 
teaching  in  the  School  of  Public  Health,  as  well  as  in  the  Schools  of 
Medicine,  Nursing,  and  Dentistry,  the  department  had  few  students  of 
its  own.  Still,  Greenberg  and  his  colleagues  found  many  ways  to  serve. 
"Statistical  advice  on  design  of  experiments  and  interpretations  of  data," 
an  anonymous  faculty  member  wrote,  "is  dispensed  with  a  lavish  hand 
to  those  who  seek  it."  Slowly,  the  department's  reputation  and  the  avail- 
ability of  fellowship  money  attracted  more  and  better  students.  By  1967 
the  department  had  a  strong  doctoral  program  that  included  specializa- 
tions in  biometry,  demography,  genetics,  and  computer  sciences.^ 

For  a  time  the  new  space  in  Rosenau  Hall  adequately  served  the 
needs  of  the  Biostatistics  Department.  There  were  individual  study 
spaces  equipped  with  electric  desk  calculating  machines  for  each  student. 


113 


Ruth  Stephenson  Hassanein  and  Ellen  Kaplan,  research  associates  in  biostatistics,  examine  data  from 
the  Univac  computer  in  the  early  1960s.  Biostatistics  was  one  of  the  first  departments  on  campus  to 
use  computer  technology. 


Jabbar  Sherwani  of  the  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering  displays  an  analog  computer 
used  for  ground-water  studies  in  eastern  North  Carolina. 


114 


There  were  laboratory  rooms  with  IBM  punch  card  machines  and  a 
Friden  Flexowriter  for  punching  paper  tape  to  be  used  in  the  university's 
Univac  computer.  But  another  growth  spurt  in  1965  quickly  filled  the 
available  rooms  in  Rosenau.  Once  again  the  department  found  it  neces- 
sary to  move  faculty  and  staff  into  temporary  space,  in  this  case  the 
Drane  Cottage  and  Drane  House  behind  the  school  on  Pittsboro  Street.' 

Perhaps  the  department's  most  enduring  contribution  during  this 
period  lay  in  establishing  the  Carolina  Population  Center.  The  school 
began  discussing  the  possibility  of  creating  a  center  for  population  studies 
in  1964.  The  idea  was  to  coordinate  ongoing  research  and  teaching  on 
population  issues,  to  expand  consulting  services  to  state  and  local  health 
agencies  as  well  as  to  foreign  countries,  and  to  increase  theoretical  re- 
search on  population  at  the  university.  The  Carolina  Population  Center 
was  set  up  in  1966,  with  Moye  Freymann  as  director.  The  scope  and 
urgency  of  population  problems  in  developing  countries,  along  with 
financial  support  from  the  Ford  Foundation,  resulted  in  an  early  con- 
centration on  international  issues.  In  North  Carolina,  the  center  worked 
with  local  agencies  to  develop  a  comprehensive  family  planning 
program. '° 


Forrest  E.  Linder,  professor 
of  biostatistics  and  founder 
of  the  Poplab,  an  agency 
that  helped  other  countries 
develop  better  demographic 
statistics  for  population 
study  and  planning. 


115 


Bert  Kaplan 


Some  members  of  the  Department  of  Epidemiology  faculty  during  the  early  1960s. 


116 


The  other  bright  star  in  Dean  Mayes's  "constellation"  was  the  De- 
partment of  Epidemiology.  The  department  undertook  numerous  studies 
in  the  1960s,  but  the  Evans  County  Cardiovascular  and  Cerebrovas- 
cular Epidemiologic  Study  drew  the  most  attention.  Evans  was  a  small 
Georgia  county  about  sixty  miles  inland  from  Savannah.  Dr.  Curtis 
Hames,  a  local  physician  in  Claxton,  noticed  in  the  1950s  that  the  black 
patients  he  treated  seemed  to  have  a  lower  incidence  of  coronary  heart 
disease  than  whites.  He  contacted  the  Public  Health  Service  about  the 
possibility  of  doing  a  study  in  Evans  County  to  see  if  his  clinical  obser- 
vations were  correct,  and  if  so  what  the  explanation  might  be.  The 
Public  Health  Service  suggested  that  Hames  contact  the  Department  of 
Biostatistics  at  Chapel  Hill  for  help  in  designing  the  program.  Bernie 
Greenberg  remembered  the  occasion: 

The  Public  Health  Service  asked  me  to  evaluate  a  research  project 
proposed  by  a  solo  medical  practitioner  in  private  practice  in  Clax- 
ton, Georgia.  I  visited  there  for  a  few  days  with  this  physician  but 
returned  with  serious  doubts  about  the  project's  feasibility. 

Nevertheless,  I  persuaded  John  Cassel  to  go  back  to  Georgia  with 
me  a  few  weeks  later  to  meet  Dr.  Curtis  Hames  in  order  to  take  a 
closer  look  at  this  project.  I  was  still  skeptical  when  we  got  on  the 
plane  to  go  there,  but  by  the  time  we  came  home,  John  and  I  were 
thoroughly  convinced  that  this  project  represented  a  unique  epi- 
demiological potential.'' 

Between  1960  and  1962,  92%  of  Evans  County's  population  over 
the  age  of  forty  underwent  medical  examinations  and  laboratory  tests. 
The  results  confirmed  Hames's  observation.  Black  males  suffered  heart 
disease  at  half  the  rate  of  white  men.  More  surprising,  however,  was 
the  fact  that  white  men  in  lower  socioeconomic  groups  had  rates  com- 
parable to  blacks.  When  the  investigators  studied  the  population  again 
between  1967  and  1969,  there  was  less  difference  among  white  men. 
"The  only  circumstances  in  which  white  men  had  as  low  rates  as  blacks," 
John  Cassel  reported,  "was  when  they  were  both  sharecroppers.  The 
only  relevant  difference  between  white  sharecroppers  and  all  other  white 
men  that  could  be  invoked  to  explain  this  finding  was  the  high  level  of 
physical  activity  in  sharecropping."  Hames  and  the  school's  epidemiol- 
ogists concluded  that  psychosocial  experiences  and  genetics  might  be 
contributing  factors,  but  that  levels  of  physical  activity  were  primarily 
responsible:'^ 


117 


Curtis  Hames  (standing)  and  Herman  Tyroler  with  delegation  from 
the  People's  Republic  of  China. 


That  study  grew  exactly  as  John  [Cassel]  had  predicted.  Today  it  is 
the  most  famous  nongovernmentally-administered  cardiovascular 
study  in  the  world.  Dr.  Curtis  Hames  turned  out  to  have  the  medical 
and  managerial  capability  that  John  had  seen  in  him,  and  the 
Evans  County  project  became  a  uniquely  comprehensive  field  of 
study  of  heart  disease  in  a  natural,  rural  setting. 

The  project  had  given  rise  to  hundreds  of  manuscripts,  dozens  of 
doctoral  dissertations,  and  best  of  all,  to  some  of  the  most  important 
discoveries  ever  made  about  the  precursors  of  coronary  thrombosis, 
hypertension,  and  myocardial  infarction.'^ 

The  rapid  expansion  of  the  Departments  of  Environmental  Sci- 
ences and  Engineering,  Biostatistics,  and  Epidemiology  caused  concern 
among  some  members  of  the  faculty.  The  increasing  emphasis  on  research 
was  one  issue,  but,  in  addition,  not  everyone  supported  the  strategy  of 
building  the  school  on  soft  money  supplied  by  the  federal  government. 
"I  didn't  believe  in  being  paid  to  do  research,"  John  Larsh,  head  of  the 
Department  of  Parasitology,  said.  "It  rubbed  me  the  wrong  way.  A  lot 
of  my  good  friends,  Bernie  Greenberg,  Dan  Okun,  and  a  lot  of  them, 
they  took  every  damn  grant  that  came  along.  Soft  money,  that's  the 
way  you  expand.  My  point  was  that  larger  was  not  necessarily  better." 
Hilton  Goulson  explained: 

John  Larsh's  philosophy  was  let's  develop  a  department  on  solid 
ground  and  to  him  solid  ground  meant  state  appropriations.  He 
would  build  the  department  by  developing  faculty  positions  with 
state  moneys.  He  was  not  as  enthusiastic  about  federal  dollars.  The 
department  would  literally  get  calls  from  NIH,  "We've  got  this  grant 


118 


program,  wouldn't  you  like  to  apply?"  Money  was  available  for  the 
asking.  His  philosophy  was  we  are  primarily  here  as  teachers,  but 
we  will  do  research  as  we  can  budget  out  time.''' 

Everyone  on  the  faculty  understood  that  long-term  security  de- 
pended on  appropriations  from  Raleigh,  but  some,  like  Dan  Okun,  saw 
the  pursuit  of  federal  grants  as  the  most  effective  short-run  strategy. 
"We  didn't  grow  out  of  state  money,"  Okun  explained,  "we  grew  on  soft 
money.  The  state  money  followed  the  soft  money.  We  would  get  a  project 
and  hire  someone  on  soft  money.  We'd  have  a  guy  and  we'd  say,  'Look, 
you're  coming  here  but  your  staying  depends  on  your  being  productive.' 
So  we'd  try  to  find  someone  who  would  be  productive,  get  research 
grants.  The  next  time  there  was  state  money,  we  said,  'Look,  we've  got 
this  guy  already  here.'  It  was  a  tactic  which  was  useful  at  the  time."'^ 


Daniel  Okun  with  1965  purchase  award,  "September  Party"  by  George  Kachergis,  at  the  School  of  Public  Health 
Annual  Art  Exhibition.  Dr.  Okun  got  the  idea  for  displaying  and  purchasing  work  by  local  artists  while  in  the 
Netherlands,  where  art  is  used  extensively  in  public  buildings. 


119 


Not  everyone  appreciated  Okun's  ability  to  bring  money  into  the 
school.  "There  was  a  lot  of  tension,"  Okun  remembered.  "We  were  thorns 
in  everybody's  side.  The  problem  in  our  department  was  always  space. 
We  needed  laboratory  space,  not  space  for  offices.  There  was  a  labora- 
tory above  us  in  [the  Department  of]  Nutrition.  They  weren't  doing 
any  research  work  at  the  time,  so  we  made  a  deal  to  use  their  labora- 
tory space.  I  went  up  and  asked  if  we  could  [also]  use  their  desks.  [The 
department  head]  said  'You're  a  cancer  in  the  school.'  This  is  the  way 
we  were  perceived  because  we  were  growing.  We  had  needs  for  everything 
[because]  we  were  getting  research  grants.  So  there  was  a  lot  of  tension. 
I  won  some  battles  but  felt  I  may  have  lost  the  war."'^ 

During  McGavran's  time  Okun  may  have  suffered  some  setbacks, 
but  by  the  mid-1960s  the  research-oriented  departments  exercised  con- 
siderable influence  in  the  school.  Although  Dean  Mayes  had  initially 
been  seen  as  a  strong  defender  of  an  older  community-service  orientation, 
under  his  leadership  the  school's  focus  clearly  shifted  to  research.  William 
Herzog,  a  student  and  faculty  member  at  the  school,  witnessed  the 
change.  "Mayes  came  in  at  a  time  when  three  of  the  four  horsemen 
who  were  most  influential  in  the  school,  Dan  Okun,  Bernie  Greenberg, 
and  John  Cassel  [Margaret  Dolan  being  the  fourth],  were  very  strong 
research  people.  To  be  credible  as  dean,  Mayes  became  more  supportive 
of  the  research-oriented  departments.  That  was  quite  a  disenchantment 
[for  some  people],  in  some  sense  a  betrayal.  We  went  from  the  idea  of 
the  community  as  the  focus  of  the  school  to  research  as  the  focus." '^ 

The  issue,  however,  was  not  merely  research  versus  teaching  and 
service,  but  what  kind  of  research  and  for  whose  benefit?  Any  research 
effort  that  relied  on  funding  from  government  agencies  and  private 
foundations  ran  the  risk  of  tailoring  its  agenda  to  fit  the  fashions  of 
the  day.  Earlier  public  health  activities  in  underdeveloped  countries,  for 
instance,  mixed  humanitarianism  with  political  and  economic  motiva- 
tions. During  the  1960s,  the  federal  government's  interest  in  finding 
cures  for  chronic  diseases  often  precluded  funding  vital  research  on 
prevention.  '^ 

The  rapid  influx  of  money,  faculty,  staff,  and  students  required 
changes  in  the  school's  administrative  structure.  Dean  Mayes,  in  his 
first  address  to  the  faculty  in  1963,  outlined  his  administrative  principles. 
These  included  "an  appropriate  division  of  labor  among  administrative, 
professional,  technical,  clerical,  and  other  fellow  workers,"  the  delegation 


120 


of  authority  to  people  in  responsible  positions,  and  autonomy  for 
department  heads." 

The  most  noticeable  administrative  reform  involved  the  expansion 
of  the  Dean's  Office.  Soon  after  his  arrival,  Mayes  appointed  John  Larsh 
as  assistant  dean  for  academic  programs,  a  position,  as  Mayes  acknowl- 
edged, that  Larsh  had  informally  held  for  a  number  of  years.  William 
S.  Flash  joined  the  school  as  assistant  dean  for  administration  and 
associate  professor  of  public  health  administration;  John  Gentry  became 
assistant  dean  for  program  development;  and  Harry  Spense  assumed  a 
position  as  a  consultant  on  international  health  programs.  In  1967 
Charles  Harper  took  Flash's  job  as  assistant  dean,  and  Robert  Moorhead 
became  an  assistant  to  the  dean. 


Charles  Harper  with  Hector  Zuluaga 


121 


Unlike  Ed  McGavran,  Fred  Mayes  saw  himself  as  more  than  the 
executive  secretary  of  the  faculty.  "The  leadership  responsibilities  of  the 
dean  require  going  far  beyond  [that]  role,"  he  said.  The  dean  served  as 
the  school's  spokesman  to  the  university  and  the  outside  world  and 
held  responsibility  for  safeguarding  the  long-term  interests  of  the  school 
and  its  faculty.  Mayes  took  Harry  Truman's  motto  as  his  administrative 
principle:  "The  buck  stops  here."  Consistent  with  the  dean's  more  exalted 
role  was  the  decision  to  rename  the  Executive  Faculty  (the  heads  of  all 
the  departments)  the  Dean's  Cabinet  (which  included  some  adminis- 
trators, and  later,  some  students  as  nonvoting  members).  ^° 

Expansion  of  the  administrative  structure  of  the  school  was  un- 
avoidable, given  the  number  of  people  involved.  Gone  were  the  days 
when  the  faculty  could  sit  around  a  table  in  the  dean's  office  and  make 
decisions.  A  stronger  central  administration  was  also  necessary  to  balance 
the  growing  inequalities  among  the  different  departments.  But  adminis- 
tration was  also  Dean  Mayes's  strong  suit,  and  that  is  where  he  decided 
to  put  his  efforts. ■^^ 

Lucy  Morgan,  for  one,  was  uncomfortable  with  this  new  adminis- 
trative style.  In  retrospect,  she  felt  that  the  school  was  being  "ruled  by 
fiat."  The  participatory  democracy  she  saw  as  essential  to  public  health, 
whether  at  the  school  or  in  the  community  was  giving  way  to  bureau- 
cracy. The  consensus  style  of  decision  making  that  had  been  a  distin- 
guishing feature  of  the  school  was  being  replaced  by  more  hierarchical 
forms.  But  underlying  Morgan's  concerns  were  other  serious  problems 
in  the  relationship  between  the  Dean's  Office  and  the  Department  of 
Public  Health  Education,  in  fact,  between  the  Dean's  Office  and  all  the 
nonresearch-oriented  departments.  ^^ 

The  retirement  of  Lucy  Morgan  and  Eunice  Tyler  in  1966  left  the 
Department  of  Public  Health  Education  understaffed  and  somewhat 
uncertain  of  its  future.  When  Department  Chair  Ralph  Boatman  and 
Dean  Mayes  asked  Elta  Mae  Mast  to  rejoin  the  faculty,  Chancellor 
Carlyle  Sitterson  questioned  the  appointment.  His  primary  concern  was 
"the  problem  of  academic  inbreeding.  A  department  the  size  of  health 
education  which  has  on  its  staff  no  person  with  graduate  training  out- 
side its  own  program  presents  real  problems."  Mayes  admitted  that  the 
department  needed  to  hire  someone  from  outside,  but  since  the  school 
trained  roughly  50  percent  of  the  people  in  the  field  of  public  health 
education,  it  was  not  easy  to  do  so.  In  any  case,  Mayes  defended  Mast 


122 


Members  of  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Education  family  gather  for  the  retirement  dinner  for  Lucy  Morgan  and 
Eunice  Tyler. 


as  an  excellent  choice.  "Her  value  as  a  very  able  teacher  has  previously 
been  demonstrated."^^ 

Meanwhile,  Mayes  had  instituted  a  wide-ranging  assessment  of  the 
school,  beginning  with  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Education. 
The  dean  appointed  an  external  committee  to  make  recommendations 
to  him  and  an  internal  committee  to  assist  in  the  gathering  of  materials 
and  to  make  suggestions  on  implementing  the  external  committee's 
recommendations.  The  external  committee's  most  important  recommen- 
dations addressed  the  need  for  more  research  by  both  students  and 
faculty  and  the  hiring  of  new  faculty  who  had  no  previous  ties  to  the 
department.'^'* 

Ralph  Boatman  stepped  down  as  head  of  public  health  education 
in  1968  to  direct  the  school's  continuing  education  program.  Dean  Mayes 
appointed  a  search  committee,  and  the  committee  selected  Dr.  Guy  W. 
Steuart,  a  native  South  African  then  teaching  at  the  School  of  Public 
Health  at  the  University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles.  Mayes  approved 
the  appointment  over  the  objections  of  the  public  health  education 
faculty.  Given  Steuart's  mandate  to  implement  many  of  the  recommen- 
dations of  the  review  committee,  particularly  to  upgrade  the  research 
capabilities  of  the  department,  the  situation  was  ripe  for  misunder- 
standing and  disagreement.  In  1971  doctors  Betty  Mathews,  Hiawatha 
Walker,  Elizabeth  McMahan,  and  Elta  Mae  Mast  resigned.  ^^ 


123 


Staying  afloat  in  the  1960s  required  constant  adaptation  to  new 
trends  in  research  and  education.  The  Department  of  Public  Health 
Administration,  for  instance,  had  to  adjust  very  quickly  to  the  enormous 
changes  in  the  health  care  delivery  system  that  took  place  in  the  1960s. 
Robert  Coker  headed  the  department  from  1960  until  his  death  in 
1966.  With  a  small  permanent  faculty  supplemented  by  part-time  visit- 
ing instructors,  the  department  taught  students  throughout  the  Division 
of  Health  Affairs.  The  complexities  of  modern  health  care  management, 
however,  posed  problems.  Bill  Herzog,  who  became  a  member  of  the 
department  in  1964,  remembered,  "The  Department  of  Health  Admin- 
istration at  the  time  didn't  have  much  depth.  Most  of  the  principal 
faculty  were  physicians.  It  wasn't  until  the  late  sixties  that  they  began 
pulling  in  faculty  who  were  trained  in  public  administration,  sociology, 
health  care  finance,  health  care  administration."^* 

The  impetus  for  change  came  from  the  heightened  demand  for 
trained  health  administrators  created  by  the  medical  care  legislation  of 
the  mid-1960s.  Preparations  for  that  change  started  shortly  before  Coker 's 
death  in  1966,  when  the  department  undertook  a  review  of  its  overall 
program.  The  review  was  put  on  hold,  but  the  department  did  revamp 
its  curriculum  and  develop  new  programs,  thanks  to  grants  from  the 
Public  Health  Service.  Arnold  Kaluzny,  Sagar  Jain,  Moye  Freymann, 
and  John  Gentry  were  among  the  new  faculty  who  joined  the  department 
in  1966.  In  1967  Morris  Schaefer  was  appointed  head  of  the  depart- 
ment. The  next  year  the  department  changed  its  name  to  Health 
Administration.  ^^ 

The  Department  of  Parasitology  also  revamped  part  of  its  program 
to  accommodate  the  demands  for  health  professionals.  In  the  late  1950s, 
representatives  from  the  Centers  for  Disease  Control  (CDC)  and  the 
laboratory  section  of  the  American  Public  Health  Association  contacted 
the  school  about  providing  a  training  center  for  laboratory  directors. 
"A  large  number  of  lab  directors  in  state  health  departments  were  ap- 
proaching retirement  age,  and  there  were  no  training  sites,"  Hilton  Goulson 
remembered.  John  Larsh  and  Ed  McGavran  expressed  interest  in  the 
project  but  worried  about  how  the  students  would  fit  into  the  existing 
degree  program.  The  school  and  the  CDC  decided  the  appropriate 
degree  would  be  the  doctorate  of  public  health.  Although  a  Dr.P.H. 
had  been  in  existence  for  many  years,  it  was  generally  a  degree  earned 
in  a  year  by  M.D.'s.  "That's  not  what  we  were  interested  in,"  Goulson 
remembered.  "This  program  for  laboratory  directors  was  similar  in  most 


124 


respects  to  the  Ph.D.,  but  rather  than  emphasizing  basic  research  this 
was  to  emphasize  applied  research,  things  that  could  be  carried  back  to 
the  laboratories  and  implemented  immediately.  It  was  funded  by  the 
National  Institutes  of  Health  with  the  agreement  that  students  would 
come  to  do  their  academic  training  here  and  their  scientific  research 
would  be  done  at  the  CDC  in  Atlanta.  We  have  provided  a  lot  of 
much-needed  manpower  in  the  public  health  laboratory,  not  only  the 
people  who  have  obtained  the  training,  but  others  who  worked  side  by 
side  with  them."  The  program  was  so  successful  that  in  1969  the  depart- 
ment changed  its  name  to  Parasitology  and  Laboratory  Practice.^® 

Relations  between  the  School  of  Public  Health  and  other  schools 
in  the  Division  of  Health  Affairs  were  either  cooperative  or  competi- 
tive, depending  on  the  people  and  the  issues  involved.  The  Department 
of  Public  Health  Nursing  and  the  School  of  Nursing  sometimes  worked 
together  and  at  other  times  agreed  to  disagree.  Soon  after  the  creation 
of  the  School  of  Nursing  in  1950,  there  was  pressure  to  eliminate  the 
baccalaureate  degree  in  public  health  nursing.  This  pressure  came  from 
the  dean  of  the  School  of  Nursing,  from  the  National  League  for  Nurses, 
and  from  some  people  within  the  School  of  Public  Health.  Some  of 
the  conflict  was  no  doubt  territorial,  but  the  major  issue  was  whether 
or  not  specialized  training  (public  health  nursing  as  opposed  to  a  more 
general  course  in  nursing)  was  appropriate  at  the  undergraduate  level. 
Certain  to  lose  accreditation  for  their  program,  the  department  finally 
stopped  accepting  undergraduates  in  1962.  Despite  the  uneasy  relation- 
ship between  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Nursing  and  the  School 
of  Nursing,  the  two  groups  did  successfully  develop  a  program  to  prepare 
teachers  of  public  health  nursing,  beginning  in  1963.  Margaret  Shetland 
was  the  first  director,  followed  by  Marie  Mclntyre  in  1967.^' 

Since  the  undergraduate  and  certificate  programs  had  been  the 
Department  of  Public  Health  Nursing's  mainstays  since  the  early  days, 
their  loss  posed  a  threat  to  the  department's  survival.  Nevertheless,  the 
department  was  able  to  hang  on  and  grow  during  the  1960s,  thanks  in 
part  to  the  influence  of  Margaret  Dolan.  Dolan  brought  great  distinction 
to  the  department  and  the  school  as  president  of  the  American  Nurses 
Association  (1963-65)  and  the  National  Health  Council  (1968-69).  She 
also  served  as  an  advocate  for  improved  health  services  on  numerous 
state  and  local  boards.  Elizabeth  Holley  and  Virginia  Nelson  had  joined 
the  department  to  fill  positions  opened  by  the  retirement  of  Ruth  Hay 
and  Margaret  Blee,  and  together  with  Margaret  Dolan  they  formed  the 


125 


William  Herzog 


Harry  Phillips 


Leonard  Rosenfeld 


nucleus  of  the  department.  Grants  from  the  Public  Health  Service  and 
increases  in  state  appropriations  allowed  the  department  to  hire  addi- 
tional faculty.^" 

The  department  m.ade  two  particularly  important  appointments  in 
the  late  1960s.  In  1967  Elizabeth  (Betty)  Edmands  came  to  the  school 
with  a  joint  appointment  in  public  health  nursing  and  maternal  and 
child  health  and  as  a  staff  member  of  the  Carolina  Population  Center. 
Margaret  Dolan  considered  Edmands  "the  most  knowledgeable  public 
health  nurse  in  the  United  States  on  family  planning."  Edmands  used 
her  expertise  not  only  in  training  students  but  also  as  a  consultant  to 
numerous  governments  in  Africa  and  Asia.  Marion  Highriter  joined 
the  department  the  next  year  to  improve  the  research  dimension  of  the 
program.  Over  the  years  Dr.  Highriter  supervised  numerous  research 
projects,  many  of  which  investigated  the  effectiveness  of  public  health 
nurses  in  a  variety  of  settings.^' 

The  school's  involvement  with  international  health  issues  increased 
dramatically  in  the  1960s.  The  school  had  had  a  strong  international 
orientation  since  the  1940s.  A  steady  flow  of  students  from  Latin  America, 
India,  and  the  Middle  East  added  a  cosmopolitan  flavor  to  MacNider 
and  Rosenau  Halls.  Faculty  passports  bore  stamps  from  all  parts  of  the 
world.  H.  G.  Baity's  move  to  Geneva,  Switzerland,  to  work  for  WHO; 
Lucy  Morgan's  travels  to  India,  Burma,  Ceylon,  and  Egypt  the  year  she 
stepped  down  as  head  of  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Education; 
Ed  McGavran's  five-year  stint  in  India  for  the  Ford  Foundation  after  he 
retired  as  Dean  — all  were  indications  of  the  faculty's  deep  involvement 
in  the  world  scene. 


126 


Moye  Freymann 


Janice  Westaby 


Dan  Beauchamp 


Morris  Schaefer 


William  Flash 


Lydia  HoUey 


Some  of  the  faculty  who  joined  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Administration  in  the 

late  1960s  and  early  1970s. 


127 


Norman  Weatherly  and  Hilton  Goulson  observe  students  in  parasitology 
lab.  Above,  left  to  right:  James  Hendricks,  Elmer  Chaffee,  and  Robert  Watson. 


128 


Nora  Clinc 


Some  members  of  the  Department  of  Public  Health  Nursing  during  the  l'560s  and  1970s. 


129 


Dean  Mayes,  John  Wright,  Harry  Spense,  and  John  Cassel  meet  with  a  delegation  of 
health  administrators  from  India  in  1964. 


International  efforts  consisted  of  teaching,  research,  and  service, 
the  threefold  mission  of  the  school.  The  Department  of  Environmental 
Sciences  and  Engineering,  for  instance,  established  a  nondegree  training 
program  for  graduate  sanitary  engineers  from  developing  countries  in 
1962,  with  grants  from  the  Agency  for  International  Development.  The 
program  eventually  drew  students  from  all  over  the  world.  The  school 
also  trained  health  workers  for  duty  in  foreign  countries.  In  the  summer 
of  1965,  the  public  health  faculty  cooperated  with  the  medical  schools 
at  UNC  and  Duke  in  a  training  program  for  Peace  Corps  doctors.  ^^ 

A  more  ambitious  training  and  service  project  was  "The  Malawi 
Public  Health  Program,"  a  Peace  Corps  project  supervised  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Epidemiology.  The  program  took  Peace  Corps  volunteers  with 
no  professional  health  training,  brought  them  to  Chapel  Hill  for  four 
months  of  instruction  and  then  sent  them  to  Malawi  in  south  central 
Africa  to  work  on  the  prevention  and  cure  of  tuberculosis.  The  program's 
objectives  were  twofold:  implementation  of  an  integrated  health  program 
using  nonprofessionally  trained  personnel  and  the  training  of  national 
counterparts  so  that  health  activities  could  continue  following  the  Peace 


130 


The  International  Program  in  Sanitary  Engineering  and  Design,  supported  by  the  United  States  Agency  for  International 
Development,  brought  engineers  to  Chapel  Hill  for  advanced  study.  Seated,  left  to  right:  James  Brown  (UNC),  Jeff  Flanagan 
(American  technician  from  Burma),  Vincent  Hemming  (Jamaica),  Pedro  Parada  (Bolivia),  Salman  El-Rawi  (Iraq),  Emmanuel 
Ojo  (Nigeria).  Standing,  left  to  right:  George  Barnes  (UNC),  Daniel  Okun  (UNC),  Horace  Beckford  (Jamaica),  All  Shubber 
(Iraq),  Walter  Fabian  (Costa  Rica). 

Corps's  withdrawal.  John  Cassel  beamed  with  pride  as  he  inspected  the 
troops.  "I  have  just  completed  a  tour  of  Malawi  with  Bill  Peck  looking 
at  our  Peace  Corps  project.  I  must  say  that  even  though  I  realize  that 
it's  still  in  its  early  stages,  I  was  absolutely  delighted  with  the  way  it 
had  progressed.  ...  I  am  really  proud  of  the  training  they  got  in  Chapel 
Hill ...  as  they  are  probably  the  best-prepared  bunch  that  have  ever 
been  sent  out  to  Malawi."^^ 

In  the  late  1950s  and  early  1960s,  a  pattern  of  social  life  oriented 
toward  departments  rather  than  the  entire  school  had  developed.  The 
rapid  growth  of  the  school  while  Fred  Mayes  was  dean  reinforced  this 
pattern.  The  Departments  of  Public  Health  Nursing  and  Public  Health 
Education,  with  their  large  classes  made  up  mostly  of  women,  set  the 
pace.  Ruth  Hay  and  Margaret  Blee  served  Hogan  stew  to  students  at 
their  home,  Dun  Roaming;  while  Lucy  Morgan  and  Eunice  (Pickie)  Tyler's 
home,  Lichenwood,  served  as  the  scene  of  numerous  social  events.  As 
more  faculty  joined  the  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and 
Engineering  and  the  student  body  increased  in  size,  Dan  Okun  inaugu- 
rated annual  parties  for  faculty  and  spouses,  informal  gatherings  for 
students  and  faculty,  and  an  annual  banquet. 

The  Department  of  Maternal  and  Child  Health  exemplified  this 
spirit  of  intradepartmental  camaraderie  and  cooperation.  Maternal  and 


131 


child  health  programs  received  special  attention  from  the  Johnson  ad- 
ministration, particularly  efforts  to  reduce  infant  mortality  rates.  The 
department  benefited  greatly  from  the  increases  in  federal  funds.  Ann 
Peters,  Naomi  Morris,  Jaroslav  Hulka,  Richard  Udry,  Earl  Siegel,  and 
Karl  Bauman  all  joined  the  faculty  in  the  mid-1960s.  "One  of  the  things 
that  I  look  back  on  with  great  pleasure,"  Geraldine  Gourley  remembered, 
"was  that  the  department  was  really  close  knit,  it  was  like  a  family.  The 
Chipmans,  the  Baumans,  the  Udrys,  the  Siegels,  the  Morrises,  and  I 
were  really  a  very  close-knit  group,  and  the  students  felt  that.  The  stu- 
dents were  made  to  feel  by  everybody  on  the  faculty  that  they  were 
professional  people  to  be  respected  and  treated  as  coworkers  in  the 
health  field.  It  was  a  wonderful  time  during  those  years."^"* 

There  were  attempts  to  combat  this  increasing  focus  on  department- 
centered  activities,  to  try  to  maintain  an  "esprit  de  corps"  that  embraced 
the  whole  school.  Dean  Mayes  and  his  wife  Dorothy  ('Mrs.  Dean') 
played  an  important  role  in  this  effort.  Mayes  explained: 

In  an  effort  to  become  personally  acquainted  with  more  students, 
Dorothy  Mayes  prepared  food  and  hosted  several  groups  of  students 
each  year  for  dinners  and  receptions  in  our  home.  Starting  with  a 
fall  reception  for  international  students,  the  entertaining  proceeded 
at  intervals  through  the  year  with  home-prepared  and  served  dinners 
for  the  officers,  committee  chairmen,  and  spouses  of  the  student 
government;  for  officers  and  spouses  of  the  Student  Wives  Club; 
for  new  faculty  members  and  their  spouses,  and  for  other  special 
groups.  The  year  would  end  up  with  a  final  all-day  Sunday  open 
house  for  all  students  and  their  families  during  commencement 
week,  opening  with  a  7:30  breakfast,  going  to  a  10:00  coffee.  .  .,  a 
12:30  luncheon  aimed  at  students  who  were  leaving  and  in  the 
throes  of  packing  up,  a  4:00  tea,  and  ending  with  a  6:30  Sunday 
night  supper— thus  breaking  up  the  guest  list  into  previously  arranged 
manageable  groups.  ^^ 

Faculty,  staff,  and  students  at  the  school  could  not  be  unaffected 
by  the  upheavals  of  the  1960s.  In  many  small  ways,  school  programs 
and  faculty  had  been  catalysts  for  social  change.  The  school,  for  instance, 
had  confronted  racial  inequality  through  its  cooperation  with  North 
Carolina  College.  The  presence  of  foreign  students,  many  of  whom 
were  dark  skinned,  challenged  the  racial  myopia  of  the  region.  The  civil 
rights  sit-ins,  which  started  in  nearby  Greensboro,  spread  to  Chapel 
Hill  in  1963,  and  members  of  the  faculty  were  among  the  most  vociferous 


132 


Earl  Schaefer 


Earl  Siege 


Sidney  Chipman 


Richard  Udry 


Barbara  Stocking 


Geraldine  Gourley 


Karl  Bauman  Xaomi  Morris  Ann  Peters 

Some  members  of  the  Department  of  Maternal  and  Child  Health  during  the  1960s. 


133 


Dean  Mayes  and  Dorothy  Mayes  congratulate  School  of  Public  Health  graduate 
Robert  Verhalen. 


supporters  of  efforts  to  end  segregation  in  Chapel  Hill.  Many  of  the 
same  people  lent  a  hand  when  food  service  workers  at  the  university 
tried  to  organize  a  union  in  1968  and  1969.^^ 

Geraldine  Gourley  served  on  the  school's  speakers  committee,  and 
she  remembered  bringing  in  "some  black  activists  to  speak  on  the  civil 
rights  issue."  "I  always  felt  complete  support  if  I  wanted  to  take  part  in 
a  demonstration.  A  lot  of  people  on  the  faculty  did  that.  I  remember 
the  strike  of  the  cafeteria  workers,  and  in  those  meetings  it  seemed  like 
half  of  the  faculty  of  the  School  of  Public  Health  would  be  represented." 
Many  faculty  members  signed  a  resolution  supporting  the  recommenda- 
tions of  the  Faculty  Council  for  increased  educational  opportunities  for 
minority  students  at  UNC.^'' 

Like  most  Americans,  people  at  the  school  had  been  relatively 
apolitical  during  the  1950s.  The  protest  movements  of  the  sixties,  how- 
ever, widened  the  playing  field  and  allowed  a  more  direct  challenge  to 
the  status  quo.  In  the  late  1960s  the  School  of  Public  Health  attracted 
advocacy-oriented  students  who  saw  adequate  access  to  health  care  as  a 
centerpiece  of  social  change.  Many  of  these  students  found  a  home  in 
the  Department  of  Public  Health  Education.  A  group  of  activists  also 
centered  around  the  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engi- 
neering. Here,  they  had  professors  who  were  outspoken  critics  of  many 
environmental  policies.  In  the  classroom  and  in  the  field,  students  ab- 
sorbed a  passion  for  change,  as  well  as  a  scientific  understanding  of  the 


issues. 


38 


134 


Students  supporting  the  strike  by  food  service  workers  at  the  university  in  1969.  Many  faculty  and  students  at 
the  School  of  Public  Health  participated  in  the  movements  for  social  change  in  the  1960s. 


Student  activists  were  not  content  merely  to  challenge  the  larger 
political  and  economic  structure,  they  also  questioned  some  administra- 
tive and  educational  procedures  in  the  school.  Student  organization 
dated  back  to  1947,  when  that  year's  class  formed  a  Program  and  Steering 
Committee.  The  committee's  primary  purpose  was  to  organize  social 
activities  that  brought  students  and  faculty  together.  An  annual  dinner- 
dance  at  the  Chapel  Hill  Country  Club  and  a  picnic  at  Hogan's  Lake 
highlighted  the  calendar.  This  committee  functioned  for  many  years, 
with  Emil  Chanlett  as  adviser.^' 

In  1968  students  organized  a  student  council,  and  in  1969  the 
Dean's  Cabinet  invited  two  students  to  attend  the  meetings  as  non- 
voting members.  A  convocation  address  by  the  student  council  president 
in  the  Fall  of  1970  was  indicative  of  the  new  attitude. 

I  welcome  each  of  you .  .  .  not  in  separate  categories  of  'students'  and 
'faculty',  but  as  colleagues  — co-participants  in  a  mutual  education 


135 


process  where  all  parties  have  an  opportunity  to  define  where  they 
stand,  to  share  whatever  knowledges  and  experiences  they  may 
have,  and  to  express  openly  what  they  expect  from  one  another. 

Last  year  at  convocation  I  alerted  those  present  that  emphasis 
would  be  placed  upon  the  use  of  the  student  council  as  an  action- 
oriented  advocate  of  student  educational  interests  with  the  desired 
outcome  that  of  an  improved  and  more  creative  learning  environ- 
ment. That  was,  and  still  is,  based  upon  the  following  premises,  the 
first  of  which  I've  already  stated:  (1)  that  students  and  faculty  are 
co-participants  in  a  mutual  educational  process;  (2)  that  students 
enter  this  school,  not  as  completely  empty  vessels  into  which  a 
whole  new  set  of  concepts,  attitudes,  and  values  will  be  funneled 
by  faculty,  but  with  a  rich  variety  of  past  experiences  which  can  be 
tapped  and  built  upon  into  a  variety  of  new  contexts  and  associa- 
tions; and  (3)  that  because  students,  as  well  as  faculty,  do  have 
these  sets  of  experience  resources  and  special  abilities,  they  have  not 
only  a  right  but  a  responsibility  to  be  co-participants  in  the  decisional 
processes  which  help  determine  the  quality  of  their  educational 
environment.  ■*" 

Students  were  particularly  critical  of  the  core  course,  The  Ecology 
of  Health.  There  were  too  many  lectures,  a  group  of  students  wrote  to 
Dean  Mayes,  and  too  much  focus  on  research  data.  "Opportunities  for 
full  exploration  of  material  and  interchange  of  ideas  were  practically  nil. 
[Faculty  members]  need  to  be  aware  of  the  desire  of  today's  students  for 
dynamic  presentations  of  relevant  course  material  on  the  ecology  of 
health."^' 

By  the  end  of  the  decade  the  school  also  began  receiving  criticism 
for  its  neglect  of  public  health  issues  in  North  Carolina.  A  1975  self- 
study  characterized  the  period  this  way: 

Relationships  with  local  communities  and  the  state  had  deteriorated 
as  departments  were  concerned  with  the  federal  dollar  and  were 
worshiping  the  idols  in  Washington  and  Bethesda.  The  image  of 
the  school  in  the  state  was  not  a  pleasant  one  to  contemplate  because 
many  local  health  department  staffs  as  well  as  the  state  health 
department  personnel  felt  the  school's  faculty  were  not  interested  in 
their  problems.  This  was  also  evident  by  the  relative  lack  of  partici- 
pation by  the  faculty  in  the  operations  and  functions  of  the  North 
Carolina  Public  Health  Association.'*^ 


136 


There  were  many  reasons  for  this  lagging  interest  in  homegrown 
issues.  First  and  foremost,  was  the  lack  of  financial  support  from  the 
state.  The  school's  growth  during  the  1960s  resulted  from  an  infusion 
of  soft  money  from  the  federal  government,  and  many  faculty  members 
had  no  particular  obligation  to  health  agencies  at  the  state  or  county 
level.  Their  careers  centered  on  research  and  service  to  the  agencies 
that  gave  them  funding.  Bill  Herzog  offered  an  example  of  the  problems 
that  situation  created.  One  of  Herzog's  first  jobs  as  assistant  director  of 
the  Continued  Education  Service  was  running  a  six-week  short  course 
for  sanitarians.  "At  that  point,"  he  remembered,  "the  Department  of 
Environmental  Sciences  wouldn't  run  it,  but  they  would  participate.  So 
I  ran  the  course  for  two  or  three  years  and  worked  with  them  to  con- 
vert it  into  an  independent  study  course  when  it  became  more  and 
more  difficult  to  get  participation  of  the  faculty  in  teaching  the  course. 
The  department  had  a  person  by  the  name  of  Gilbert  Kelso.  He  kept  a 
very  good  relationship  with  the  health  people.  When  Gilbert  left,  a 
significant  point  of  contact  was  lost  between  the  sanitarians  in  the  local 
health  departments  and  the  school."  Justified  or  not,  the  retreat  from 
service  to  the  state  did  little  to  help  the  school,  particularly  when  it 
came  time  to  ask  for  more  money  for  buildings.''^ 

Still,  there  were  some  notable  exceptions.  In  the  early  1960s,  Charles 
Cameron  helped  secure  a  grant  from  the  Public  Health  Service  for  a 
program  in  continuing  education.  John  Wright  served  as  director  of  the 
Continued  Education  Service  (reorganized  into  Continuing  Education 
and  Field  Service  in  1969),  and  in  1964  Bill  Herzog  returned  to  the 
school  after  working  at  the  Research  Triangle  Institute  (RTl).  Herzog 
spent  much  of  his  time  at  RTI  scouting  for  federal  money,  experience 
that  came  in  very  handy  in  his  new  job.  "At  that  time  continuing  edu- 
cation was  federally  financed  and  every  time  we  wanted  to  do  a  short 
course  we  would  write  up  a  short  grant  proposal.  Writing  grant  proposals 
had  become  a  real  art  at  that  point,  so  we  really  took  off  with  more 
and  more  short  courses'"*"* 

The  decline  in  service  to  the  state  was  one  of  the  issues  university 
Chancellor  J.  Carlyle  Sitterson  asked  a  study  commission  to  examine  in 
1970.  Bernie  Greenberg  chaired  the  commission,  which  included  repre- 
sentatives from  the  school's  faculty  and  other  areas  of  the  university. 
The  commission  recognized  the  enormous  changes  that  had  taken  place 
in  the  world  since  the  end  of  World  War  II.  Science  and  technology 
had  advanced  at  a  rapid  pace,  and  people  were  putting  increased  pres- 


137 


sure  on  government  to  distribute  the  benefits  of  those  advances  more 
equitably.  Public  health,  the  commission  feared,  had  not  kept  up  with 
these  changes  and,  worse  still,  was  not  providing  leadership  in  planning 
for  future  health  needs. '^^ 

Unlike  most  self-study  groups,  the  chancellor's  committee  made 
some  far-reaching  recommendations.  The  commission  called,  among 
other  things,  for  the  school  to  "institute  baccalaureate  programs  to  serve 
as  a  prototype  for  other  universities  and  community  colleges,"  to  develop 
a  model  community  health  center,  and  to  recruit  minority  faculty.  The 
commission  also  suggested  that  the  school's  name  should  be  changed  to 
School  of  Community  and  Public  Health,  to  reflect  the  broadened  con- 
stituency it  would  serve  in  the  1970s.'** 

The  most  controversial  recommendation  centered  on  an  adminis- 
trative restructuring  that  would  eventually  combine  the  Departments  of 
Health  Administration,  Health  Education,  Maternal  and  Child  Health, 
Mental  Health,  Public  Health  Nursing,  and  Public  Health  Nutrition 
into  a  Department  of  Community  Health  Practices  and  Administration. 
The  reorganization  of  the  school  was  necessary,  the  commission  said, 
because  the  present  structure  reflected  "rather  rigidly  a  constituency 
that  is  no  longer  in  the  ascendency."  Ta  survive,  the  school  had  to  adapt 
more  rapidly  to  the  "changing  marketplace  for  its  product."  This  meant 
the  school  needed  to  streamline  its  operations  according  to  the  wealth 
and  status  of  the  departments  as  they  stood  after  a  decade  of  federal 
support.  Since  the  service-oriented  departments  had  not  fared  well  dur- 
ing the  federal  funding  battles  of  the  1960s,  they  should  be  consolidated, 
thus  reducing  their  disciplinary  independence.  Given  the  nature  of  the 
recommendations,  controversy  was  sure  to  follow.'*^ 


138 


Dr.  John  Larsh  (right),  head  of  the  Department  of  Parasitology  and  Laboratory  Practice,  confers  with  Polish  scientist, 
Dr.  M.  Stankievvicz,  about  research  on  trichinosis. 


139 


Dean  Bernard  Greenberg  created  the  Division  of  Community  Health 
Service  in  1972  so  that  the  school  could  better  serve  the  needs  of  the 
state.  Richard  House  {upper  left)  headed  the  continuing  education 
program  from  1976-1984  and  became  director  of  the  division  in  1984. 
Environmental  consultant  Linda  Little  {upper  right)  served  as  an  adjunct 
professor  in  the  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering. 
Howard  Barnhill  (lou'er  right)  coordinated  the  Area  Health  Education 
Centers  in  the  western  part  of  the  state.  A  nutrition  student  {lower  left) 
counsels  a  mother  on  the  proper  diet  for  her  child  as  part  of  her  field 
work. 


140 


(T^hapter  ^ 


PRACTICE  WHAT 
YOU  TEACH 


The  1970s  was  a  period  of  remarkable  contrasts.  The  decade 
opened  with  popular  resistance  to  the  war  in  Southeast  Asia 
and  protest  movements  among  blacks,  women,  and  students. 
Ten  years  later,  the  nation  elected  one  of  its  most  conservative  presi- 
dents, Ronald  Reagan.  In  between,  Watergate,  the  oil  embargo,  runaway 
inflation,  and  the  Iran  hostage  crisis  seemed  to  mark  the  end  of 
postwar  confidence  and  prosperity. 

Health  care  experienced  similar  ups  and  downs.  The  reformist 
impulses  of  the  1960s  carried  over  until  mid-decade  as  consumers  de- 
manded stricter  regulation,  advocates  for  the  poor  and  minority  groups 
pushed  for  more  entitlement  programs,  and  the  environmental  movement 
called  for  tougher  laws  to  ensure  clean  air,  clean  water,  and  workplace 
safety.  But  stagflation  put  a  break  on  further  growth  and  experimenta- 
tion, and  by  1980  the  political  mood  of  the  country  turned  against  the 
Great  Society  programs  that  had  spurred  the  expansion  of  public 
health  programs  since  the  1960s.' 

The  School  of  Public  Health  did  much  soul-searching  during  the 
1970s.  A  self-study  committee  seemed  always  to  be  in  session.  The 
volatility  of  national  social  and  political  life  contributed  to  this  reflective 
mood,  but  the  school  had  its  own  problems.  It  had  continued  to  grow, 
even  after  the  mid-decade  financial  crisis.  The  operating  budget  for 
1969-70  was  almost  $7  million;  by  1979-80  it  had  jumped  to  over  $20 
million.  Student  enrollment  rose  from  391  to  702  during  the  same  period. 
Faculty  appointments  (full-  and  part-time)  increased  from  158  to  317. 
But  consolidation  rather  than  innovation  was  the  watchword  of  the 
decade.  Dean  Mayes  had  allowed  departments  to  expand  (or  not  to 
expand)  on  their  own.  The  result  was  a  great  imbalance  in  the  strength 


141 


and  resources  of  the  departments.  The  1970s  demanded  a  more  con- 
certed effort  at  overall  planning  for  the  school.^ 

The  school's  mission  also  seemed  unclear.  Some  faculty  thought 
that  the  school  was  governed  too  often  by  a  nose  for  financial  support 
rather  than  a  comprehensive  plan  for  attacking  the  world's  health  prob- 
lems. The  status  of  women  and  minorities  also  caused  concern.  In  earlier 
days  women  had  played  a  major  role,  and  the  school  had  directed 
much  effort  toward  the  educational  needs  of  blacks  and  American 
Indians.  But  by  the  1970s,  the  recruitment  of  women  and  minorities 
had  become  a  major  problem. 

The  first  problem  addressed  by  the  school  was  the  issue  of  minority 
recruitment.  The  school  had  long  been  committed  to  public  health 
training  for  minority  groups.  Until  the  1960s,  this  commitment  entailed 
support  for  graduate  programs  in  public  health  nursing  and  public 
health  education  at  North  Carolina  College  in  Durham.  In  1960  those 
programs  were  disbanded,  and  black  students  enrolled  at  the  school, 
albeit  in  relatively  small  numbers. 

In  1970  the  slow  pace  of  integration  and  a  general  upsurge  of  black 
activism  prompted  black  students  to  issue  "A  Statement  of  Concerns 
Regarding  the  Relevance  &  Responsiveness  of  the  School  of  Public 
Health  to  the  Needs  of  Black  Americans."  "The  situation  of  Blacks  in 
the  South,"  the  statement  read,  "is  not  unlike  that  of  residents  of  de- 
veloping countries.  We  have  become  increasingly  cognizant  of  the  mag- 
nitude and  severity  of  the  health  problems  and  needs  of  our  fellow 
Blacks  and  view  this  decade  as  a  critical  period  for  ourselves,  the  nation, 
and  institutions  that  wish  to  be  a  part  of  the  solution."  The  students 
requested  increases  in  the  number  of  black  students  and  faculty,  more 
courses  geared  to  the  needs  of  students  planning  to  work  in  the  black 
community,  the  appointment  of  a  minority  recruitment  officer,  and 
greater  black  involvement  in  projects  relating  to  the  black  community.^ 

Dean  Mayes  appointed  a  committee  to  consider  the  students'  de- 
mands. The  committee  recommended  hiring  a  full-time  minority  recruiter, 
and  William  Small  eventually  took  the  job.  A  student  had  approached 
him  about  applying  for  the  position.  "He  said  'We  need  someone  who 
knows  something  about  public  health,  who  has  been  through  the  school, 
and  who  knows  what  it  takes  to  get  through,'"  Small  remembered.'* 

William  Small  knew  the  school  quite  well.  A  native  of  Wilmington, 
North  Carolina,  Small  majored  in  chemistry  at  North  Carolina  College 


142 


frst  wjl 


William  Small  advising  Rebera  Foston. 


and  then  spent  a  few  years  with  the  American  Tobacco  Company.  He 
returned  to  graduate  school  and  received  his  M.S.P.H.  from  the  Air 
and  Industrial  Hygiene  program  in  the  Department  of  Environmental 
Sciences  and  Engineering  in  1969.  Small  was  working  as  a  chemist  for 
the  State  Board  of  Health  when  he  decided  to  apply  for  the  recruit- 
ment position.' 

"The  School  of  Public  Health  was  really  in  the  forefront  of  efforts 
to  recruit  minority  students  at  the  graduate  level,"  Small  remarked.  "We 
were  the  first  school  to  hire  someone  full-time  and  go  at  it  in  a  syste- 
matic manner.  We  involved  faculty,  students,  staff  and  used  all  kinds  of 
techniques  to  reach  out  into  the  community  to  attract  students,  and  it 
paid  off."  In  the  fall  of  1972,  less  than  a  year  after  Small  accepted  the 
job,  the  number  of  minority  students  increased  from  twenty  to  forty- 
nine.  The  next  year  the  school  began  to  concentrate  on  black  faculty.^ 

A  stronger  minority  presence  in  the  school  highlighted  the  need 
to  make  the  curriculum  more  relevant  to  the  needs  of  the  black  com- 
munity. Concerns  included  white  instructors'  insensitivity  to  black 
students  and  a  lack  of  understanding  of  the  complexities  of  black  com- 
munity life.  A  minority  health  conference,  initiated  in  1977,  helped 
"create  a  feeling  of  pride  and  understanding  among  the  students,"  Small 
recalled.  "We  felt  that  minority  students  who  were  training  here  would 
be  the  leaders  of  tomorrow  in  the  health  field.  They  needed  to  know 
how  to  get  organized  and  put  on  programs.  The  conference  was  planned 
and  run  by  the  students.  It  was  learning  outside  the  classroom."^ 

Increased  minority  recruitment  was  one  of  the  many  recommen- 
dations made  by  the  Chancellor's  Study  Commission  in  1971,  and  it 


143 


boded  well  for  the  future  that  the  school  moved  quickly  on  this  issue. 
By  contrast,  a  number  of  factors  conspired  to  prevent  the  implementa- 
tion of  the  commission's  plan  for  far-reaching  changes  in  the  school's 
administrative  structure.  Little  could  be  done  until  after  Dean  Mayes's 
retirement,  scheduled  for  1973.  Nevertheless,  Dr.  Dorothea  C.  Leighton 
of  the  Department  of  Mental  Health  chaired  a  committee  that  began 
to  canvass  faculty  opinion  on  the  report.  Virtually  no  one  supported 
changing  the  school's  name  to  the  School  of  Community  and  Public 
Health.  "The  school  is  community-oriented  by  definition,"  Robert  Watson 
of  the  Department  of  Parasitology  and  Laboratory  Practice  wrote,  "why 
gild  the  lily  by  stating  this  in  the  name  of  the  school."  Strong  opposi- 
tion to  departmental  reorganization  also  surfaced.  "Consolidation  of  the 
nutrition  department  with  five  unrelated  'service'  units  is  a  retrograde 
step,"  wrote  Department  of  Nutrition  Chair  Joseph  Edozien.  "Nutrition 
is  as  much  a  science  in  its  own  right  as  are  parasitology,  biostatistics 
and  epidemiology."® 

When  Dean  Mayes  elected  to  step  down  early  at  the  end  of  the 
1971-72  academic  year,  the  chancellor  appointed  a  search  committee. 
But  there  was  little  question  who  the  next  dean  would  be.  When  the 
committee  polled  the  faculty,  the  name  of  Dr.  Bernard  Greenberg  came 
up  time  after  time.  "By  any  standard— professional  competence,  admin- 
istrative skill,  innovative  practice,  regard  for  staff  well-being,"  Roy  Kuebler 
wrote,  "[Bernard  Greenberg]  merits  and  receives  the  respect  and  loyalty 
of  all  who  work  with  him.  .  .  .His  devotion  to  the  university  and  his 
long  intimate  knowledge  of  its  ins  and  outs  combined  with  his  profes- 
sional and  personal  characteristics  lead  me  to  see  him  as  a  top  ranking 


nominee  for  our  new  dean."^ 


As  a  faculty  member  since  1949,  the  only  chairman  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Biostatistics,  and  chairman  of  the  Chancellor's  Study  Commis- 
sion, Greenberg  knew  the  strengths  and  weaknesses  of  the  school  as 
well  as  anyone.  He,  John  Cassel,  and  Dan  Okun  had  talked  for  years 
about  how  they  would  do  things  if  they  got  the  chance.  Now  Greenberg 
had  the  opportunity.  In  brief,  he  envisioned  a  more  rigorous  academic 
institution,  dedicated  to  research  and  teaching.  Greenberg  was  also 
determined  to  secure  a  new  building  and  to  improve  the  school's  stand- 
ing in  the  state.  In  the  end,  the  effort  to  acquire  a  building  and  the 
rededication  to  North  Carolina,  more  than  academic  restructuring, 
guided  his  tenure  as  dean. 


144 


Dean  Bernard  Greenberg 


If  Washington  and  Bethesda  had  been  the  center  of  the  school's 
attention  in  the  1960s,  Raleigh  became  the  focus  of  the  1970s.  Greenberg 
surveyed  the  school's  problems  and  concluded  that  poor  relationships 
with  state  and  local  health  agencies  constituted  the  school's  most  serious 
failing.  Determined  to  mend  fences,  he  moved  ahead  on  a  number  of 
fronts. '° 

Greenberg's  first  move  was  to  reactivate  the  Alumni  Association 
and  resume  publication  of  The  Body  Politic.  He  believed  that  a  strong 
alumni  association  would  keep  the  school  in  better  touch  with  public 
health  practitioners,  whose  involvement  would  then  increase  the  effec- 
tiveness of  the  school's  programs.  Harriet  Barr  became  director  of  public 
relations  for  the  school,  with  responsibility  for  the  Alumni  Association. 
Barr  received  her  M.P.H.  in  public  health  education  in  1948  and  re- 
turned to  the  school  in  1965  as  a  research  associate  in  that  department. 
She  was  an  assistant  professor  at  the  time  she  undertook  her  work  in 
public  relations." 

The  school  held  its  first  annual  Alumni  Day  in  1973,  at  which 
time  the  association  was  formally  established.  A  steering  committee 
worked  out  the  fine  points  of  organization  over  the  next  year,  and  in 


145 


William  A.  Darity 


April,  1974,  Dr.  William  A.  Darity,  dean  of  the  School  of  Health  Sci- 
ences at  the  University  of  Massachusetts,  became  the  first  president. 
Within  a  few  years  the  Alumni  Association  had  become  a  highly  visible 
arm  of  the  school.  The  Body  Politic  began  appearing  three  times  a  year 
in  1975.  Social  hours  at  the  American  Public  Health  Association  and 
North  Carolina  Public  Health  Association  meetings  provided  opportu- 
nities for  alumni  to  keep  in  touch  with  one  another  and  with  the  faculty. 
The  Fred  T.  Foard  Memorial  Lecture,  delivered  by  a  distinguished  public 
health  person,  anchored  the  annual  Alumni  Day,  and  the  association 
established  numerous  awards  to  recognize  the  contributions  of  former 
students  of  the  School  of  Public  Health.'^ 

Dean  Greenberg  moved  to  improve  the  school's  standing  among 
the  state's  health  officials  by  creating  the  Division  of  Community  Health 
Service  in  1973.  The  division  included  Continuing  Education,  the  Off- 
Campus  Master's  Degree  Program,  the  Area  Health  Education  Centers, 
the  Technical  Assistance  Unit,  and  Field  Relations.  Dr.  Charles  Harper 
directed  the  division  and  was  very  clear  about  its  purpose.  "Originally, 
the  school  had  a  strong  North  Carolina  focus,  beginning  as  it  did  with 
a  continuing  education  program  in  1936,"  he  said.  "As  the  school  grew 
in  size  and  prestige,  we  responded  to  strong  pressures  from  national 
and  international  sources  for  training  programs  in  public  health.  As  a 
result,  the  school,  over  time,  developed  an  international  and  national 
focus  that  overshadowed  its  original  commitment  to  North  Carolina. 
The  division's  role  has  been  to  right  that  balance."'^ 


146 


Senator  Edmund  S.  Muskie  deli' 


the  1976  Fred  T.  Foard  Memorial  Lecture. 


Dr.  John  Hughes  assumed  direction  of  Continuing  Education. 
Hughes  had  extensive  contacts  with  public  health  officials  in  the  state 
because  of  his  work  with  the  Dental  Health  Division  of  the  State  Board 
of  Health.  He  joined  the  Department  of  Health  Administration  in 
1966,  heading  the  Dental  Public  Health  Program.  Under  his  leadership, 
Continuing  Education  attempted  to  bring  the  latest  public  health  knowl- 
edge to  professionals  in  the  field.  Through  noncredit  short  courses  and 
training  sessions,  the  unit  upgraded  skills  that  were  learned  in  earlier 
years  and  introduced  new  techniques.''' 

Under  Dr.  Morris  Schaefer's  leadership,  the  school  initiated  the 
Off-Campus  Master's  Degree  Program  in  1969  to  allow  employees  of 
state  and  local  health  departments  to  complete  degree  requirements  on 
a  part-time  basis  while  they  continued  to  work.  Students  received  an 
M.P.H.  in  health  administration  at  the  end  of  three  years.  The  first 
program  was  held  in  Raleigh,  followed  by  programs  in  Asheville  in  1974 


147 


Lydia  HoUey  and  Howard 

Fitts  attend  the  School 

of  Public  Health  reception 

at  the  annual  North 

Carolina  Public  Health 

Association  meeting. 

School  faculty  and  alumni 

became  more  involved  in 

the  association  in  the 

1970s. 


and  in  Fayetteville  in  1977.  The  school  added  a  degree  in  public  health 
nursing  in  Greenville  (1977)  and  Hickory  (1980). '^ 

The  Technical  Assistance  Unit  of  the  division  represented  Green- 
berg's  efforts  to  strengthen  the  school's  contact  with  state  and  local 
health  agencies.  In  its  pure  form,  technical  assistance  involved  members 
of  the  faculty  in  a  direct  consulting  role;  for  example,  they  would  help 
to  devise  a  health  survey  for  a  county.  But  assistance  also  took  the 
form  of  serving  on  the  boards  of  agencies,  such  as  the  North  Carolina 
Affiliate  American  Heart  Association. 

Another  development  geared  to  the  public  health  needs  of  the 
state  was  the  bachelor  of  science  in  public  health  program.  The  training 
of  undergraduate  public  health  nurses  had  ceased  in  1962.  But  the 
need  for  entry-level  community  health  workers  put  pressure  on  the 
school  to  resume  the  program.  Frances  Gust  and  Ed  McGavran  tried  to 
build  a  resource  for  the  training  of  local  public  health  workers  by  co- 
operating with  the  newly  established  community  college  system,  but  to 
no  avail.  Responding  to  recommendations  by  the  Chancellor's  Study 
Commission  and  the  1972  Legislative  Study  Commission  on  Public 
Health  in  North  Carolina,  the  school  moved  to  reinstitute  the  bacca- 
laureate degree  in  public  health.  A  grant  from  the  federal  government 
helped  establish  undergraduate  concentrations  in  biostatistics,  health 
administration,  health  education,  nutrition,  and  environmental  protec- 
tion. Students  entered  at  the  beginning  of  their  junior  year.'* 

The  Area  Health  Education  Center  (AHEC)  was  a  bold  initiative 
of  national  importance.  Operated  as  a  cooperative  program  of  the  Schools 


148 


Sarah  Morrow,  a  School 
of  Pubhc  Health  alumna 
and  secretary  of  Human 
Resources  during  the  ad- 
ministration of  Governor 
James  B.  Hunt,  delivers 
an  address  during  public 
health  week.  At  right  is 
Jacob  Koomen,  Jr., 
another  school  alumnus 
who  served  as  State 
Health  Officer  from 
1966-1972. 


of  Medicine,  Dentistry,  Nursing,  Pharmacy,  and  Public  Health,  AHEC 
established  educational  programs  in  areas  that  lacked  easy  access  to 
major  health  centers.  A  gross  imbalance  in  health  personnel  existed  in 
North  Carolina,  as  in  other  states,  and  one  way  to  right  that  was  to 
decentralize  health  and  medical  education.  The  regional  centers  provided 
training  for  practicing  professionals,  course  development  for  technical 
and  community  colleges,  and  student  trainees.  The  School  of  Public 
Health  assigned  some  students  whose  programs  required  field  training 
to  the  centers.'^ 

No  sooner  had  Dean  Greenberg  embarked  on  these  various  efforts 
to  improve  the  teaching  and  service  components  of  the  school,  than 
President  Richard  Nixon  delivered  a  budget  message  that  sent  shock 
waves  through  the  public  health  community.  As  part  of  his  administra- 
tion's "New  Federalism,"  Nixon  recommended  termination  of  federal 
support  for  schools  of  public  health  and  for  research  training  grants  as 
of  June  30,  1973.  Greenberg  declared  the  proposed  cuts  would  "cripple 
schools  of  public  health  across  the  country.  Some  of  the  nation's  18 
schools  will  almost  certainly  have  to  close  if  they  do  not  receive  emer- 
gency funds."  ^® 

The  school  took  a  number  of  steps  to  meet  the  threatened  fiscal 
crisis.  University  officials  lobbied  congressmen  and  senators  in  an  effort 
to  restore  the  cuts.  The  dean  appealed  to  the  North  Carolina  General 
Assembly  for  emergency  funds  and  to  private  foundations  for  additional 
scholarships.  The  school  also  instituted  some  minor  restructuring  in  an 
effort  to  economize. 


149 


The  School  of  Public  Health  reinstated  an  undergraduate  degree  program  in  1976,  as  part  of 
Dean  Greenberg's  efforts  to  train  more  North  Carolinians.  Above,  members  of  the  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Public  Health  Advisory  Committee.  Left  to  right:  Craig  Turnbull,  Godfrey  Hochbaum, 
Ralph  Patrick,  Elizabeth  Coulter,  Fred  Stevens,  Laurel  Files,  and  Terry  Bazzarre. 


Fortunately,  the  lobbying  effort  proved  successful,  and  Congress 
extended  the  Hill-Rhodes  Act  for  another  year.  But  with  the  financial 
future  anything  but  stable,  Greenberg  tried  to  overcome  the  resistance 
to  the  reorganization  recommended  by  the  Chancellor's  Study  Commis- 
sion. "He  had  a  honeymoon  period,"  Dan  Okun  recalled.  "I  said,  'do  it 
now.  Get  rid  of  some  of  those  departments.'  [But]  he  felt  he  couldn't 
do  it."  Pressure  from  alumni  and  faculty  in  the  affected  departments, 
Okun  concluded,  held  Greenberg  back.  Others  felt  that  the  political 
and  personal  costs  of  making  major  changes  in  the  face  of  strong  oppo- 
sition had  simply  been  too  great.  In  the  end,  the  school  eliminated  the 
Department  of  Mental  Health  and  left  everything  else  intact.  '^ 

The  strain  on  schools  of  public  health  brought  about  by  the  legacy 
of  social  and  technological  upheaval  and  the  threatened  funding  cut- 
backs was  highlighted  by  a  much-discussed  report,  "Higher  Education 
for  Public  Health,"  compiled  for  the  Association  of  Schools  of  Public 
Health  by  the  Milbank  Memorial  Fund.  Dr.  Cecil  Sheps,  a  former 
member  of  the  school's  faculty  and  vice  chancellor  for  health  sciences 
at  the  university,  chaired  the  Milbank  Commission.  The  commission's 
thirty-four  recommendations  called  for  the  "reorganization  and  systema- 
tization"  of  the  educational  system.  "What  exists  now  is  chaotic,  wasteful, 
and  dysfunctional,"  Sheps  wrote.  "What  is  needed  is  greater  clarity  of 
purpose  to  serve  urgent  public  needs."^" 


150 


Vice  Chancellor  for 
Health  Affairs  Cecil 
Sheps  and  Dean  Bernard 
Greenberg. 


The  commission  also  stressed  the  need  for  improved  leadership  in 
public  health  and  urged  the  schools  to  focus  their  energies  in  that  di- 
rection. The  commission  encouraged  public  health  faculty  to  become 
advocates  "for  effective  health  policies,  programs,  and  practices."  Although 
such  actions  would  often  "entangle  them  in  political  or  otherwise  con- 
troversial efforts,"  the  commission  felt  that  the  problems  of  the  environ- 
ment and  in  the  delivery  of  health  services  required  that  those  who 
knew  the  most  about  the  issues  speak  up.^^ 

Dean  Greenberg  and  Dr.  Sheps  discussed  some  of  the  Milbank 
Commission's  early  assessments  in  The  Body  Politic.  Greenberg  pointed 
to  a  number  of  areas  where  the  school  had  already  moved  to  implement 
the  commission's  recommendations:  undergraduate  training  and  greater 


151 


Roy  R.  Kuebler,  Jr.,  of  the  Department  of 

Biostatistics,  receives  the  school's  first  Edward  G. 

McGavran  Award  for  excellence  in  teaching.  Left 

CO  right:  Bert  Kaplan,  chairman  of  the  selection 

committee.  Dean  Greenberg,  Mary  McGavran, 

and  Kuebler. 


Dean  Greenberg  presents  the  McGavran  Award  in 
1981  to  Patricia  Z.  Barry  of  the  Department  of 
Health  Policy  and  Administration  for  her  inno- 
vative use  of  small  groups  in  classroom  teaching. 


152 


service  to  the  state,  for  instance.  But  Greenberg  admitted  "it  is  a  diffi- 
cult process  to  change  organizational  structures  within  the  school." 
Since  collapsing  practice-oriented  departments  seemed  an  impossibility, 
whether  desirable  or  not,  Greenberg's  only  choice  was  to  strengthen 
the  weaker  departments.  In  doing  so,  Greenberg  had  the  help  of  a  new 
group  of  young  department  chairs  who  worked  hard  to  improve  the 
standing  of  their  faculty  and  of  the  school. -^^ 

Each  of  the  practice-oriented  departments  — health  education,  public 
health  nursing,  health  administration,  nutrition,  and  maternal  and 
child  health  — took  a  different  route  and  developed  in  unique  ways  over 
the  next  few  years.  Health  administration  and  maternal  and  child 
health  experienced  the  greatest  successes,  although  in  different  ways. 

Thanks  to  increased  federal  support  for  local  health  agencies  in 
the  sixties  and  early  seventies  and  the  rapid  growth  in  the  field  of 
health  care,  the  demand  for  qualified  health  administrators  far  outran 
the  available  supply.  Unfortunately,  the  Department  of  Health  Admin- 
istration lacked  the  ability  to  train  large  numbers  of  capable  administrators 
when  Dr.  Sagar  Jain  assumed  the  chair  in  1971,  and  the  Schools  of 
Medicine,  Business,  and  Public  Administration  competed  for  interested 
students.  Instruction  suffered  from  the  lack  of  faculty  trained  in  the 


Sagar  Jain 


153 


social  and  administrative  sciences.  The  department,  at  the  time,  was 
made  up  of  health  clinicians  — physicians,  nurses,  therapists.  "They  could 
describe  the  health  care  system  very  well,"  Jain  recalled.  "Often  they 
could  identify  the  issues  on  the  basis  of  their  personal  observation.  The 
only  question  was  how  to  solve  them."  Experience  and  "wisdom"  sub- 
stituted for  methodology,  Jain  believed.  He  went  to  work  to  change 
that,  with  the  support  of  both  Dean  Mayes  and  Dean  Greenberg.^^ 

Jain's  own  degree  was  in  public  administration,  and  he  began  hiring 
people  with  training  in  operations  research,  finance,  and  economics. 
Research  continued  to  suffer,  however,  because  of  the  teaching  loads 
and  service  responsibilities  of  these  new  faculty  members  and  because 
the  department  lacked  a  "critical  mass"  in  the  various  disciplines.  Prodded 
by  criticism  of  the  department's  teaching  capabilities  and  its  limited 
contact  with  former  health  administrators,  the  school  increased  the 
faculty  in  these  key  areas.  By  1981  Jain's  strategy  paid  off  and  the  de- 
partment changed  its  name  to  Health  Policy  and  Administration  and 
began  offering  a  Ph.D.  degree.^'* 

The  women's  movement  and  changing  attitudes  toward  sexuality 
heightened  the  public's  awareness  of  maternal  and  child  health  issues 
and  increased  the  demand  for  public  programs.  The  Department  of 
Maternal  and  Child  Health  benefited  from  this  increased  exposure  and 
grew  dramatically  during  the  seventies.  The  department  experienced 
two  changes  of  leadership  during  the  decade.  When  Earl  Siegel  stepped 


C.  Arden  Miller 


154 


Joseph  Edozien 


Mildred  Kaufman 


down  as  chair  in  1975,  Dean  Greenberg  named  Dr.  Naomi  Morris  as 
Siegel's  replacement.  As  a  pediatrician  and  public  health  physician, 
Morris  had  combined  clinical  experience  with  a  successful  career  as  a 
teacher  and  researcher.  For  Morris,  the  department's  primary  purpose 
was  to  train  the  physicians,  nurses,  and  social  workers  needed  by  local, 
state,  and  national  programs.  But  the  department  also  had  an  active 
research  component  aimed  at  providing  a  better  understanding  of  the 
problems  mothers  and  children  faced.  Teenage  pregnancies,  delayed 
child  bearing,  and  day  care  were  some  of  the  issues  that  interested 
faculty.  ^^ 

In  1977  Dr.  Morris  moved  to  Chicago,  and  Dr.  C.  Arden  Miller 
took  charge  of  the  department.  Miller  brought  extensive  administrative 
experience  to  the  job,  having  served  as  dean  of  the  University  of  Kansas 
School  of  Medicine  before  coming  to  the  University  of  North  Carolina 
as  vice  chancellor  for  health  sciences  (1966-1971).^^ 

Nutrition  became  an  important  national  and  international  concern 
in  the  1970s,  and  the  Department  of  Nutrition  attracted  increasing 
numbers  of  students,  faculty,  and  research  grants.  Dr.  Joseph  Edozien's 
appointment  as  chair  in  1971  allowed  Rebecca  Bryan  to  return  to  full- 
time  teaching  and  consulting.  Dr.  Edozien  also  reclaimed  the  department's 
laboratory  space  and  began  to  attract  students  interested  in  biochemical 


155 


¥ 

\ 

i*.      V^B 

■ 

&  ;.;:  M^ 

^^4      ■    ^Y^-    ■ 

^:' 

^■'' ^^^r  w 

^-"^^ 


Marion  Highriter 


Dorothy  Talbot 


ir^ 


Elizabeth  Edmands 


Ann  Hansen 


Marie  Mclntyre  Julia  Watkins 

Some  faculty  members  in  public  health  nursing  in  the  1970s. 


156 


research.  In  fact,  there  was  some  concern  by  the  mid-1970s  that  the 
department  had  become  too  research  oriented.  ^^ 

The  department's  projects,  however,  often  had  policy  implications. 
The  school's  nutritionists,  for  instance,  found  themselves  caught  up  in 
political  battles  in  Washington  as  part  of  their  evaluation  of  the  Special 
Supplemental  Food  Program  for  Women,  Infants,  and  Children  (WIC). 
The  department's  three-year  study  concluded  that  the  supplements  in- 
creased the  weight  and  the  health  of  the  infants  and  children  in  the 
program  and  reduced  anemia  among  mothers.  "The  WIC  program  is 
one  of  the  most  important  and  successful  of  the  food  assistance  pro- 
grams," Dr.  Edozien  remarked.  The  Department  of  Agriculture  and 
President  Gerald  Ford  were  less  enthusiastic,  and  it  took  a  congressional 
override  of  a  presidential  veto  to  sustain  the  program.  ^^ 

By  the  early  1980s,  education  was  being  proposed  to  replace  such 
entitlement  programs  as  solutions  to  the  problem  of  poverty.  A  1982 
project  headed  by  Mildred  Kaufman  of  the  Department  of  Nutrition, 
with  Jonathan  Kotch  of  the  Maternal  and  Child  Health  Department  and 
Robert  Cefalo  from  the  School  of  Medicine,  was  a  case  in  point.  The 
project,  funded  by  the  March  of  Dimes  Birth  Defects  Project,  sought  to 
improve  the  health  and  nutrition  of  pregnant  women  by  training  health 
professionals  who  would  counsel  them.  Behavior  modification  and  diet 
counseling  were  certainly  helpful  in  reducing  infant  mortality,  but  as 
the  WIC  program  had  shown,  low-income  women  needed  more  than 
education  to  sustain  a  healthy  diet.'^' 

The  Departments  of  Health  Education  and  Public  Health  Nursing 
expanded  their  research  bases  in  the  seventies,  but  preparation  of  front- 
line practitioners  and  service  to  health  agencies  continued  to  be  their 
strong  suit.  The  Department  of  Health  Education  maintained  its  direct 
involvement  with  local  groups  through  the  Rural  Community  Environ- 
mental Education  Project.  The  environmental  movement  had  largely 
bypassed  poor  rural  residents.  Dr.  John  Hatch  noted,  and  problems 
such  as  substandard  housing,  improper  waste  disposal,  poor  water  quality, 
and  fire  hazards  abounded.  John  Hatch,  Ethel  Jackson,  and  graduate 
students  in  the  department  worked  with  residents  of  a  rural  black  com- 
munity in  Chatham  County  to  reduce  environmental  health  and  safety 
risks.  ^° 


157 


Ethel  Jackson 


John  Hatch 


Guy  Steuart  chaired  the  Depart- 
ment of  Health  Education  from 
1969  to  1985.  During  that  time 
the  department  led  the  school  in 
the  recruitment  of  minority  faculty 
and  students.  Dr.  Steuart  later 
served  as  director  of  the  Office  of 
International  Public  Health 
Programs. 


158 


John  Hatch  oversaw  a  more  ambitious  education  project  in  the 
Republic  of  Cameroon  in  western  Africa.  Funded  by  a  $1.9  million 
grant  from  the  U.S.  Agency  for  International  Development,  the  project 
emphasized  education  and  self-help  as  means  of  preventing  disease  and 
lowering  mortality.  It  encouraged  the  Cameroon  government  to  under- 
take a  modernization  campaign  aimed  at  changing  traditional  health 
beliefs  and  habits.  The  team  of  consultants  from  various  departments 
in  the  school  worked  with  health  officials  to  improve  their  understand- 
ing of  health  issues  and  suggest  ways  of  communicating  this  knowledge 
to  their  countrymen.^' 

Although  the  practice-oriented  departments  improved  during  the 
1970s,  the  research-oriented  departments  — epidemiology,  environmental 
sciences  and  engineering,  biostatistics,  and  parasitology  and  laboratory 
practice— remained  the  key  to  the  school's  national  standing.  A  center- 
piece of  the  Department  of  Biostatistics's  research  program  in  the  1970s 
was  the  Lipid  Research  Clinics  Program.  Begun  in  June,  1971,  with  a 
grant  from  the  National  Heart,  Lung  and  Blood  Institute,  the  program 


Left  to  right:  James  Grizzle,  Bernard  Greenberg,  Dale  Williams,  and  Michel  Ibrahim  work  on  the  renewal  contract  for  the 
Lipids  project. 


159 


measured  blood  fat  levels  in  subjects  at  selected  hospitals  in  the  United 
States,  as  well  as  in  Canada,  Israel,  and  the  Soviet  Union.  The  program 
sought  to  determine  the  relationship  between  lipids  and  heart  disease 
and  in  particular  to  discover  whether  lowering  cholesterol  levels  reduced 
the  risk  of  heart  attacks  and  strokes.  The  grant  established  the  Central 
Patient  Registry  and  Coordinating  Center  (CPR)  at  the  School  of  Public 
Health.  From  its  offices  in  the  NCNB  building  in  downtown  Chapel 
Hill,  the  CPR  established  standard  procedures  for  patient  testing  and 
collected  and  analyzed  data.^^ 

One  of  the  more  intriguing  aspects  of  the  program  was  the  partici- 
pation of  two  clinics  in  the  Soviet  Union.  In  1973  James  Grizzle  of  the 
Biostatistics  Department  and  Herman  Tyroler  of  the  Epidemiology  De- 
partment visited  the  Soviet  Union  to  work  out  plans  for  a  cooperative 
United  States-Soviet  Union  lipids  research  project.  A  few  years  later, 
Soviet  specialists  began  visiting  Chapel  Hill.  "Flowering  in  the  climate 
of  detente,"  an  observer  noted,  "the  historic  collaboration  has  seen  visiting 
teams  of  scientists  and  physicians  traveling  back  and  forth .  .  .  between 
the  two  countries  working  toward  the  mutual  goals  of  cutting  the  high 
number  of  deaths  from  heart  disease  in  both  countries."  ^^ 

In  1973  Daniel  Okun  stepped  down  as  chair  of  the  Department  of 
Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering.  He  was  replaced  by  Russell  F. 
Christman,  who  came  to  Chapel  Hill  from  the  University  of  Washington. 
A  chemist  by  training,  Christman,  like  Okun,  was  interested  in  water 
quality  control.  Christman  did  not  see  the  department  as  having  a 
direct  role  to  play  in  solving  environmental  problems.  "Our  principal 
goal,"  he  explained,  "is  to  seek  through  research  more  accurate  descrip- 
tions of  basic  environmental  problems  which  would  be  useful  for  public 
decision  making."^'' 

By  the  mid-1970s,  those  environmental  problems  were  immense. 
During  the  energy  crisis  brought  on  by  the  oil  embargo,  the  nation 
turned  to  coal,  nuclear  power,  and  wood  as  alternative  fuel  sources,  all 
of  which  posed  potential,  but  little  understood,  dangers  to  the  atmo- 
sphere. The  pesticides  and  other  chemicals  that  helped  make  the  United 
States  the  leading  producer  of  food  in  the  world  also  caused  cancer  in 
farm  workers  and  consumers  alike. 

The  environmental  movement  spurred  a  major  expansion  of  health- 
related  activities  in  the  private  sector.  The  federal  government,  through 
the  Environmental  Protection  Agency  and  the  Occupational  Health 


160 


Mindel  Sheps 


Regina  Elandt-Johnson 


Michael  Symons 


Pranab  Sen 


Richard  Shachtman 


Gary  G.  Koch 
Some  faculty  members  in  biostatistics  in  the  1970s. 


161 


Morris  Shiffman 


Richard  Kamens 


1^   t^^      '^ 


Edward  Kuenzler 


Alvis  Turner,  Jr. 

-JIIM 

1^^ 

k 

l- 

\ 

1 

f 

Tfl 

\\  <^ 

1 

llfi 

ii 

Frederic  Pfaender 


James  Lamb  III 


Donald  Francisco 


Donald  Johnson 


162 


Parker  Reisr 


James  Watson,  Jr. 


Mark  Sobsey 


Some  members  of  the  Department  of  Environmental  Sciences  and  Engineering  in  the 
1970s. 


163 


and  Safety  Act,  required  tougher  health  and  safety  standards  in  the 
workplace,  reductions  in  pollution  levels,  and  safer  consumer  products. 
To  comply  with  these  new  requirements  and  improve  public  relations, 
corporations  began  efforts  to  address  some  of  their  problems.  This  cor- 
porate campaign  had  two  effects  on  the  school.  First,  departments  such 
as  epidemiology,  environmental  sciences  and  engineering,  and  biostatis- 
tics  contracted  with  firms  to  conduct  health  studies  and  run  training 
programs.  Second,  a  larger  proportion  of  the  school's  graduates  found 
employment  in  industry  and  nonprofit  organizations. 

One  of  the  more  interesting  consulting  projects  involved  the  school 
in  a  cooperative  venture  with  the  United  Rubber  Workers  Union  and 
major  tire  companies.  In  1970  the  discovery  of  a  respiratory  illness  asso- 
ciated with  a  chemical  process  in  tire  manufacturing  spurred  the  creation 
of  the  Joint  Occupational  Health  Program  involving  both  the  union 
and  the  tire  manufacturers.  The  program  contracted  with  the  school  to 
study  health  problems  among  rubber  workers.  Led  by  Dr.  David  Fraser, 
the  Occupational  Health  Studies  Group  first  conducted  mortality  studies 
and  then  began  investigating  environmental  problems  in  the  workplace. 
The  long-term  goal  was  to  establish  a  system  to  monitor  employees' 
health  and  to  evaluate  the  health  risks  of  new  manufacturing 
processes.^' 

The  Department  of  Epidemiology  also  addressed  itself  to  more 
local  concerns.  In  cooperation  with  the  North  Carolina  Affiliate  Amer- 
ican Heart  Association  and  the  Tarboro  Clinic,  Dr.  Michel  Ibrahim 
and  Dr.  Lawrence  Cutchin  directed  a  hypertension  control  program  in 
Edgecombe  County.  High  blood  pressure  was  a  major  health  problem 
in  North  Carolina,  particularly  among  blacks  and  other  rural  people. 
The  program  sought  to  identify  patients  suffering  from  hypertension 
who  could  then  be  treated  with  different  methods  to  determine  levels 
of  effectiveness.  The  program  also  taught  physicians  new  ways  of  en- 
couraging patients  to  maintain  their  treatment  regimen.^* 

Under  the  circumstances,  the  school  navigated  the  uncertainties  of 
the  seventies  well.  It  continued  to  be  ranked  as  one  of  the  best  schools 
of  public  health  in  the  country,  and  many  of  its  faculty  members  won 
individual  honors,  highlighted  by  the  election  first  of  Margaret  Dolan 
and  then  of  C.  Arden  Miller  to  the  presidency  of  the  American  Public 
Health  Association.  Dean  Greenberg's  admonition  to  the  faculty  "to 
practice  what  you  teach"  proved  moderately  successful,  and  relations 


164 


Carl  Shy 


David  Kleinbaum 


Caroline  Becker 


Victor  Schoenbach  and  Joyce  Allen 
Some  members  of  the  Department  of  Epidemiology  during  the  1970s. 


Sherman  James 


165 


Top:  The  retirement  party  for  Gil 

Clarke  (center).  Mrs.  Clarke  is  at 

right  and  Kay  Cox  Wijnberg  on  the  left. 

Right:  Registrar  Emmy  Lxju  Palladino 
escorts  Madeline  Harbin  at  her  retire- 
ment party.  Through  an  administrative 
oversight,  Mrs.  Harbin  worked  at  the 
school  until  she  was  80  years  old. 


.♦ 


,i 


with  state  and  local  health  agencies  improved.  The  Division  of  Com- 
munity Health  Services  oversaw  an  array  of  services  that  benefited  the 
delivery  of  health  programs  in  the  state,  and  the  faculty  served  North 
Carolina  in  many  capacities  in  numerous  organizations. 

Still,  problems  remained.  The  inflationary  crisis  of  the  1970s  put  a 
severe  strain  on  the  university's  budget.  Some  feared  the  School  of 
Public  Health  was  losing  ground  to  other  institutions.  "Increases  in 
faculty  salaries  have  not  matched  inflation  during  the  last  four  or  five 
years,"  the  1976  annual  report  declared.  "Special  perquisites,  such  as  free 
parking  and  preference  in  tickets  to  sports  events,  have  been  reduced 
or  eliminated.  This  erosion  will  reach  a  breaking  point  soon  and  when 
the  dam  bursts,  small  patchwork  efforts  will  not  suffice."  The  lack  of  a 
sabbatical  program  also  made  it  difficult  to  attract  and  keep  good  faculty 
and  detracted  from  their  research  and  instructional  efforts.  ^^ 


166 


Typical  office  scenes 
in  Rosenau  Hall. 
Overcrowding  was  an 
extreme  problem  at 
the  school  during  the 
1980s. 


The  school's  record  in  regard  to  women  and  minorities  also  needed 
improvement.  Despite  early  success  in  recruiting,  the  black  presence  in 
the  student  body  leveled  off  at  12  percent  by  the  end  of  the  decade. 
Medical  and  dental  schools  competed  more  effectively  for  blacks  in  the 
post-civil  rights  era.  Moreover,  the  pool  of  qualified  students  increasingly 
came  from  northern  cities,  and  some  potential  students  from  outside 
the  region,  black  and  white,  hesitated  to  attend  school  in  the  South. 


167 


Efforts  to  recruit  Native  American  students  were  even  less  successful.  In 
response,  the  school  hired  Ronald  Oxendine,  a  Lumbee  Indian  from 
Maxton,  as  director  of  American  Indian  Recruitment  Services.  ^^ 

Recruiting  minority  faculty  proved  even  more  difficult.  The  pool  of 
qualified  candidates  for  most  jobs  was  quite  small,  and  in  some  fields 
nonexistent.  Furthermore,  pressures  on  minority  faculty  once  they  were 
at  the  school  made  it  difficult  to  retain  them.  The  demand  for  minority 
members  to  serve  on  departmental,  school,  and  university  committees, 
as  well  as  minority  students'  need  for  counseling  and  advice,  made  it 
difficult  for  them  to  find  time  for  research.  ^^ 

The  relatively  small  percentage  of  women  on  the  faculty  stemmed 
from  structural  factors,  as  well  as  from  decisions  by  the  school.  In  1960, 
twenty  years  after  the  school  began  granting  graduate  degrees,  women 
occupied  roughly  one-third  of  the  faculty  positions.  By  1980  the  pro- 
portion had  slipped  to  less  than  20  percent.  The  Departments  of  Public 
Health  Nursing  and  Public  Health  Education  accounted  for  the  major- 
ity of  the  1960  positions.  The  presence  of  these  programs  was  notable 
because  few  schools  of  public  health  had  either  one.  The  federal  gov- 


Committee  for  the  '-''•Hh  dtittoral  examination  [ircMdcJ  o\cr  bv  John  Larsh.  Standing, 
left  to  right:  Hilton  Goulson,  William  Fleming,  Norman  Weatherly,  John  Reed.  Seated, 
left  to  right:  John  Feeley,  doctoral  candidate  Sally  Liska,  John  Larsh,  and  Charles  Okey. 


168 


ernment's  romance  with  health  issues  in  the  1960s,  however,  benefited 
medical  and  scientific  endeavors  — disciplines  that  were  dominated  by 
men  — rather  than  the  helping  professions,  which  were  dominated  by 
women.  Nursing,  education,  nutrition,  and  maternal  and  child  health 
lost  ground  to  hard  sciences  such  as  epidemiology  and  biostatistics. 
The  result  was  an  erosion  of  the  number  of  women  at  the  school. 


The  Jean's  start,   1982.  Standing,  left  to  right:  Dean  Greenberg,  Robert  Moorhead,  Harriet  Barr,  Ernest  Schoenfeld. 
Seated,  left  to  right:  Dana  Quade,  Robert  Harris,  Jr.,  Elizabeth  Coulter,  Charles  Harper,  William  Small,  Jr. 


169 


m. 


'■■■>! 


IMJ 


.iL  ...  ,  .«c  w.  lit 


c 


■iSSSSsiSfc.;-- 


McGavran-Greenberg  Hall 


170 


IppilogulR 


The  1980s  brought  extensive  cutbacks  in  federal  funding  for  health- 
related  programs.  At  the  same  time  the  rising  cost  of  medical 
care  and  the  growing  number  of  uninsured  families  put  added 
pressures  on  the  public  health  system  in  the  United  States.  By  the  end 
of  the  decade  an  Institute  of  Medicine  report  concluded  that  the 
United  States  had  "allowed  the  system  of  public  health  activities  to  fall 
into  disarray."  As  in  the  past,  many  health  problems  were  related  to 
poverty,  but  many  others  cut  across  class  and  racial  lines.  Toxic  wastes  that 
contaminated  the  water,  air,  soil,  and  food  affected  everyone.  Drug  and 
alcohol  abuse,  AIDS,  accidents,  Alzheimer's  disease,  unwanted  pregnancies, 
and  the  aging  of  the  population  constituted  the  decade's  most  pressing 
health  problems.^ 

The  School  of  Public  Health  weathered  the  attack  on  federal  spending 
for  social  services,  as  the  state  increased  its  contribution  to  the  school 
and  the  private  sector  invested  more  dollars  in  university-based  research. 
Between  1979  and  1989,  the  school's  budget  increased  from  $17  million 
to  $30  million,  student  enrollment  from  652  to  878,  and  the  number  of 
full-time  faculty  from  146  to  162.  Growth,  however,  exacerbated  a  perennial 
problem:  lack  of  space.  By  1980  faculty  offices  and  classrooms  were 
scattered  in  eighteen  separate  locations  across  campus  and  in  the  town 
of  Chapel  Hill,  and  Rosenau  Hall  was  bursting  at  the  seams. ^ 

As  soon  as  he  became  dean  in  1972,  Bernie  Greenberg  began  lobbying 
the  Division  of  Health  Affairs,  the  chancellor,  and  the  General  Admin- 
istration to  support  his  request  for  additional  space.  But  there  always 
seemed  to  be  more  urgent  needs.  The  first  good  news  came  in  January, 
1980,  when  University  of  North  Carolina  President  William  Friday  in- 
formed Dean  Greenberg  that  the  school  would  receive  $100,000  for  the 
planning  of  a  new  building.  That  same  year  the  Board  of  Governors 
gave  top  priority  to  a  Public  Health  and  Environmental  Sciences  building. 
The  architects  prepared  drawings  and  a  scale  model  of  the  proposed 
building,  but  the  General  Assembly  did  not  appropriate  the  necessary 


171 


funds.  When  Dean  Greenberg  retired  in  1982,  his  dreams  of  a  major 
expansion  of  the  school's  physical  facilities  had  not  been  realized.^ 

University  officials  chose  Dr.  Michel  A.  Ibrahim,  professor  and 
chair  of  the  Department  of  Epidemiology,  to  succeed  Greenberg.  Ibrahim 
had  been  a  member  of  the  school's  community  since  1960,  when  he 
began  study  for  an  M.P.H.  in  biostatistics.  He  switched  fields  and  took 
a  Ph.D.  in  epidemiology  in  1964  before  leaving  for  Buffalo,  New  "fork, 
to  serve  on  the  faculty  of  the  State  University  of  New  York  at  Buffalo 
Medical  School.  In  conjunction  with  his  faculty  position,  he  later  became 
first  deputy  commissioner  in  the  Erie  County  Health  Department. 
Ibrahim  returned  to  Chapel  Hill  in  1971  as  a  professor  in  the  Department 
of  Epidemiology  and  succeeded  John  Cassel  as  chair  of  that  depart- 
ment in  1976.  This  combination  of  academic  excellence,  administrative 
ability,  and  familiarity  with  the  school  made  Dr.  Ibrahim  an  outstanding 
choice  for  the  deanship. 


Dean  Michael  A.  Ibrahim 


172 


"When  I  took  over"  Dr.  Ibrahim  remembered,  "the  school  was  well 
respected  nationally.  My  job  was  to  preserve  that  high  standing  and 
improve  on  it  if  I  could.  One  of  the  first  things  I  wanted  to  do  was  get 
the  building  for  the  school,  because  you  can't  achieve  your  mission 
without  proper  facilities.  The  facilities  here  were  very  inferior  compared 
to  other  schools  and  other  places  on  campus,  especially  the  laboratories 
and  classrooms."'* 

Dean  Ibrahim,  along  with  faculty,  staff,  and  the  school's  supporters 
throughout  the  state,  went  to  work  to  secure  funding  for  a  new  building. 
"It  was  now  or  never,"  Ibrahim  felt.  The  North  Carolina  General 
Assembly  finally  approved  funds  for  a  Public  Health  and  Environmental 
Sciences  building  in  June,  1985.  Construction  began  in  1986,  and  the 
125,000  square-foot  building  opened  in  the  early  part  of  1990.^ 

In  addition  to  helping  secure  McGavran-Greenberg  Hall  and  the 
Herman  G.  Baity  Environmental  Engineering  Laboratory,  Dean  Ibrahim 
instituted  a  number  of  important  changes  at  the  school.  Between  1982 
and  1989  he  appointed  a  new  chair  in  every  department.  In  many  cases 
the  search  committees  and  the  dean  selected  people  from  outside  the 
school.  "The  majority  were  people  from  the  outside,"  Ibrahim  observed, 
"[but]  I  went  for  the  best  person.  Now  we  have  a  team  of  fresh,  new 
chairs  who  will  be  looking  ahead  and  pushing  the  departments  and 
the  school  to  greater  and  better  horizons."* 

Although  the  school  maintained  the  tradition  of  strong,  independent 
departments,  complex  health  problems  increasingly  required  that  people 
from  different  disciplines  work  together.  To  encourage  interdisciplinary 
teaching  and  research,  which  the  school  had  deemphasized  in  the  1960s 
and  1970s,  Ibrahim  established  three  new  programs:  the  Program  on 
Health  Promotion  and  Disease  Prevention,  the  Office  of  International 
Public  Health  Programs,  and  the  Program  on  Aging.  These  combined 
with  the  Institute  for  Environmental  Studies  and  the  Occupational 
Health  Studies  Program  to  give  the  school  vital  centers  for  addressing 
some  of  the  most  pressing  health  problems. 

Improved  teaching  continued  to  be  a  primary  concern  for  faculty 
and  administrators.  Students  of  the  1980s  were  younger  than  their 
counterparts  of  earlier  years  and  brought  less  public  health  experience 
to  the  classroom.  They  required  different  teaching  methods  and  more 
extensive  contact  with  adjunct  professors  drawn  from  various  health 


173 


The  Dean's  Cabinet  and  Statt,   b'^'O.  First  row,  left  to  right:  Maria  Salmon,  Hilton 
Gouison,  Michel  Ibrahim,  Richard  House,  Barbara  Hulka,  Robert  Moorhead. 
Second  row:  Milton  Kotelchuck,  Ernest  Schoenfeld,  James  Sorenson,  Mildred 
Kaufman,  Charles  Rasberry,  Kerry  Kilpatrick.  Third  row:  Barry  Margolin,  Harriet 
Barr,  Donald  Fox,  William  Small,  William  Glaze. 


174 


agencies.  The  Learning  Resources  Center  (established  in  1986)  represented 
an  effort  by  the  school  to  enhance  teaching.  The  center  produced  a 
variety  of  media  materials  for  classroom  use,  as  well  as  for  professional 
presentations  and  public  information.  It  also  provided  faculty  with 
consultation  on  new  educational  and  communications  technologies. 

Although  the  school  paid  more  attention  to  teaching,  research 
continued  to  be  the  yardstick  by  which  faculty  were  judged,  and  in  that 
regard  the  school  played  a  leading  role  among  schools  of  public  health. 
The  scope  of  both  basic  and  applied  research  conducted  by  faculty  and 
staff  during  the  1980s  would  have  startled  yet  pleased  the  school's  pioneers. 
From  laboratory  research  aimed  at  developing  a  vaccine  for  syphilis  to 
field  studies  seeking  to  reduce  smoking  among  teenagers,  the  school's 
research  efforts  covered  virtually  every  serious  public  health  problem.  There 
was  continuity  in  many  of  the  projects.  The  Lipids  Research  Clinics 
Program  continued  its  international  collaborations  on  the  relationship 
between  lipids  and  cardiovascular  disease.  A  follow-up  of  the  Evans 
County,  Georgia,  study  found  a  steady  decline  in  deaths  due  to  strokes 
and  heart  attacks  over  the  previous  two  decades.  A  new  study  of  the  WIC 
nutritional  program  included  faculty  from  a  number  of  departments. 
But  many  new  health  problems,  such  as  radon,  AIDS,  magnetic  field 
exposure,  and  eating  disorders,  also  received  attention  by  researchers. 

Smoking  was  probably  the  most  sensitive  public  health  issue  in 
North  Carolina  during  the  1980s,  and  the  school  took  the  lead  in  analyzing 
the  effects  of  tobacco  and  in  developing  ways  to  help  people  quit 
smoking.  In  the  school's  early  days  tobacco  was  an  accepted  part  of  daily 
life:  Rosenau  kept  a  pipe  at  his  side  and  Dean  McGavran  was  rarely 
without  a  cigarette.  But  by  1989,  the  school  no  longer  permitted  smoking 
in  any  of  its  buildings.  Spurred  on  by  the  antismoking  campaign  of 
Surgeon  General  C.  Everett  Koop,  researchers  associated  with  the  school 
worked  to  develop  new  methods  for  breaking  the  tobacco  habit.  One 
such  program  focused  on  blacks,  who,  by  the  late  1980s,  had  smoking  rates 
above  the  national  average  and  as  a  result  had  higher  incidences  of 
heart  disease  and  lung  cancer.  School  researchers  were  not  unmindful 
of  the  economic  impact  of  reduced  tobacco  consumption  on  the  state's 
farmers  and  also  studied  ways  to  ease  farmers'  dependence  on  the  crop. 

Public  service  remained  an  important  component  of  the  school's 
overall  mission,  and  the  school  maintained  the  ties  to  state  and  local 


175 


health  agencies  built  during  the  1970s.  But  in  addition  to  the  county 
health  departments,  in  the  1980s  the  school  gave  assistance  to  voluntary 
health  organizations,  schools,  local  environmental  agencies,  and  cor- 
porations. To  adapt  to  this  changing  constituency  and  to  improve  the 
school's  service  efforts  and  to  communicate  them  to  the  general  public, 
Dean  Ibrahim  established  the  School  of  Public  Health  Board  of  Ad- 
visors in  1985.  Members  represented  civic  and  advocacy  groups,  vol- 
untary health  organizations,  professional  associations,  and  various  govern- 
ment agencies.^ 

As  the  school  approached  its  golden  anniversary,  it  began  planning 
for  the  future.  With  the  support  of  Dean  Ibrahim,  the  school  developed 
a  strategic  planning  process.  Begun  as  a  loosely  structured  discussion 
among  administrators  and  faculty  in  1986,  the  process  became  more 
formalized  the  next  year  with  the  appointment  of  a  Strategic  Planning 
Committee  headed  by  Arnold  Kaluzny,  professor  of  Health  Policy  and 
Administration.  The  size  and  diversity  of  the  school  required  a  more 
systematic  approach  to  growth  than  had  prevailed  in  the  past.  The 
faculty  could  no  longer  hash  out  ideas  over  lunch  in  the  dean's  office. 
Rapid  technological  changes  and  uncertain  political  developments  also 
necessitated  more  careful  forays  into  the  future. 

The  committee  defined  strategic  planning  "as  a  continuous  process 
conducted  by  the  leadership  of  the  school  in  order  to  identify  important 
school-wide  issues,  analyze  these  issues  from  the  perspective  of  existing 
and  future  environmental  forces  and  organizational  characteristics,  and 
develop  mechanisms  for  their  resolution."  Although  similar  to  past  patterns 
of  dealing  with  critical  issues,  the  new  process  structured  planning  into 
the  everyday  life  of  the  school.^ 

As  a  start  the  committee  solicited  the  opinions  of  the  faculty  and 
outside  evaluators  on  the  critical  issues  facing  the  school.  Not  unex- 
pectedly, the  faculty  focused  on  improving  the  educational  environment 
at  the  school  — the  need  to  attract  high  quality  faculty  and  students,  the 
need  for  improvements  in  the  curriculum,  the  need  for  space  and  support 
services— while  outsiders  emphasized  the  need  for  the  school  to  expand 
its  involvement  with  state  and  local  health  agencies.  All  parties  agreed 
that  the  school  had  to  continue  to  find  ways  of  addressing  serious  con- 
temporary health  problems. 

In  identifying  the  issues  the  planning  process  should  address,  the 
committee  confronted  a  host  of  institutional  and  social  issues.  It  was  a 


176 


Long  a  leader  in  the  use  of 
computers  for  scientific  work, 
in  1982  the  school  led  the  way 
into  the  office  automation  era 
by  installing  a  mini-computer 
for  word  processing,  electronic 
mail,  and  other  office  and 
administrative  tasks.  Above, 
Russell  Christraan  receives  in- 
struction from  his  administrative 
assistant,  Maggie  Schimert,  on 
the  use  of  electronic  mail. 
Belou;  Harvey  Jeffries,  who  was 
instrumental  in  establishing 
the  new  system,  confers  with 
Operations  Manager  Robert 
Middour. 


177 


question  of  which  problems  were  paramount  and  the  manner  in  which 
the  school  could  best  organize  itself  to  address  and  solve  them.  There 
were  dozens  of  institutional  issues  that  had  no  direct  relation  to  the 
larger  health  concerns,  but  which  were  of  critical  importance  if  the 
school  were  to  accomplish  its  mission.  The  committee  decided  to  focus 
on  problems  facing  the  school  and  identified  eight  issues  for  the  planning 
process  to  address:  departmental  versus  school  mission;  the  School  of 
Public  Health's  administrative  and  financial  structure;  the  appropriate 
balance  between  education,  research,  and  service;  public  education 
about  health;  policy  development  and  advocacy;  research  dissemination; 
student  enrollment;  and  continuing  education. 

The  highlight  of  the  strategic  planning  process  was  an  afternoon 
and  evening  retreat  attended  by  117  faculty  members  in  March,  1989. 
For  the  first  time  in  almost  forty  years,  the  faculty  formally  sat  down 
to  discuss  the  school's  purpose  and  direction.  The  issues  were  not  that 
different  from  the  discussions  instigated  by  Dean  McGavran  in  the  early 
1950s,  and  as  always  the  faculty  expressed  a  wide  range  of  opinions. 
There  was  general  consensus  that  the  committee  had  raised  important 
questions,  but  there  was  also  an  understanding  that  there  were  no 
simple  answers. 

As  it  planned  for  the  future,  the  School  of  Public  Health  could 
take  pride  in  the  many  accomplishments  of  its  first  fifty  years.  From  its 
beginnings  in  1936  as  a  division  of  the  Medical  School,  it  had  emerged 
as  one  of  the  outstanding  schools  of  public  health  in  the  world. 
Thousands  of  students  had  left  the  school  for  jobs  in  private  and  public 
health  agencies  in  every  state  and  in  numerous  foreign  countries.  Their 
contributions,  and  those  of  the  faculty,  in  basic  and  applied  research 
and  in  the  improvement  of  the  health  of  people  around  the  world  were 
incalculable. 

The  school's  success  can  be  attributed  in  large  part  to  the  breadth 
of  its  scientific  and  educational  undertakings  and  its  flexible  response  to 
changes  in  the  public  health  agenda.  The  school  was  blessed  with  out- 
standing leaders  — administrators,  educators,  and  scientists.  These  men 
and  women  came  from  numerous  disciplines  — engineering,  education, 
biomedical  research,  administration,  and  statistical  analysis— to  build  a 
school  with  a  wide  range  of  research  and  educational  activities.  Adherents 
of  an  administrative  and  social  reform  philosophy  of  the  health  movement 
worked  side-by-side  (though  not  always  seeing  eye-to-eye)  with  propo- 
nents of  a  more  scientifically  oriented  model.  The  University  of  North 


178 


Carolina  was  the  first  school  of  public  health  to  train  all  members  of 
the  public  health  team:  public  health  nurses,  health  educators,  biosta- 
tisticians,  sanitary  engineers,  nutritionists,  and  epidemiologists. 

This  makeup  insured  a  student  body  with  diverse  interests  and  ex- 
pectations. The  short  courses  of  the  late  1930s  helped  the  employees  of 
southeastern  health  departments  better  perform  their  duties  as  health 
officers,  sanitarians,  and  engineers.  The  public  health  nurses  and  health 
educators  who  filled  the  classrooms  during  the  1940s  and  early  1950s 
staffed  growing  state  and  local  health  agencies.  The  training  of  front-line 
health  practitioners  declined  over  the  years  as  more  students  prepared 
for  administrative,  research,  and  teaching  positions.  But  off-campus  and 
continuing  education  programs  helped  keep  practitioners  up  to  date. 

As  the  school  approaches  its  fiftieth  anniversary,  it  can  celebrate  the 
realization  of  Dr.  Rosenau's  dream  of  developing  a  "real"  school  of 
public  health.  But  Rosenau's  other  dream,  "of  a  time  when  .  .  .every  man 
shall  possess  sufficient  for  the  needs  of  his  body  and  the  demands  of 
health,"  has  proved  more  illusive.  Despite  a  century  of  extraordinary 
progress,  serious  public  health  problems  — some  old,  some  new— continue 
to  plague  the  state,  nation,  and  world.  Infant  mortality  rates  in  North 
Carolina  are  the  highest  in  the  country;  AIDS  has  reached  epidemic 
proportions  in  parts  of  the  United  States;  and  millions  of  people  around 
the  globe  suffer  from  malnutrition.  In  attempting  to  address  the  problems 
of  the  1990s,  health  officials  will  be  plagued  by  the  same  situation  that 
led  to  the  founding  of  the  School  of  Public  Health  in  the  1940s,  the 
shortage  of  trained  health  workers.  Even  today  the  majority  of  public 
health  practitioners  lack  formal  training. 

The  School  of  Public  Health  cannot  solve  the  state's  (or  the 
world's)  problems  by  itself.  Poverty,  ignorance,  and  governmental 
neglect  continue  to  impede  the  creation  of  a  healthy  society.  Still,  if 
progress  is  to  be  made,  the  school  must  remain  dedicated  to  finding 
solutions  to  today's  health  problems,  educating  the  public  about  means 
of  disease  prevention,  and  advocating  increases  in  social  expenditures 
for  health.  Dr.  Rosenau's  credo  can  provide  a  guidepost  for  the  next 
half  century.  "When  young  men  have  vision,  the  dreams  of  old  men 
come  true." 


179 


CHAPTER  1 

1.  Carl  V.  Reynolds  to  Rosemary  M.  Kent,  July  30,  1962,  School  of  Public  Health 
Records,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives,  University  of  North  Caro- 
lina, Chapel  Hill  (hereafter  cited  as  SPH). 

2.  C.  S.  Mangum  to  Milton  J.  Rosenau,  September  26,  1935,  SPH. 

3.  Milton  J.  Rosenau  to  A.  S.  Rose,  September  29,  1939,  SPH. 

4.  Milton  J.  Rosenau,  Curriculum  Vitae,  SPH. 

5.  George  Rosen,  A  Histor.'  of  Public  Health  (New  York:  MD  Publications,  1958), 
201. 

6.  Rosen,  A  History  of  Public  Health,  278,  287-90;  Paul  Starr,  The  Social  Transfor- 
mation of  American  Medicine  (New  York:  Basic  Books,  1982),  181;  Barbara 
Rosenkrantz,  Public  Health  and  the  State:  Changing  Views  in  Massachusetts, 
1842-1936  (Cambridge;  Harvard  University  Press,  1972),  97-127;  Elizabeth  Fee, 
Disease  and  Discovery:  A  History  of  The  fohns  Hopkins  School  of  Hygiene  and 
Public  Health,  1916-1939  (Baltimore:  The  Johns  Hopkins  University  Press, 
1987),  13. 

7.  Rosen,  A  History  of  Public  Health,  294;  Fee,  Disease  and  Discovery,  22. 

8.  Fee,  Disease  and  Discovery,  14-22. 

9.  Benjamin  E.  Washburn,  A  History  of  the  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health, 
1877-1925  (Raleigh,  N.  C:  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health,  1966), 
8-22. 

10.  Washburn,  History  of  N.  C.  Board  of  Health,  38. 

11.  Washburn,  Histoo'  of  hi.  C.  Board  of  Health,  41-2;  J.  W  Roy  Norton  and 
Benjamin  Drake,  "History  of  Public  Health  in  North  Carolina,"  in  Essays  in 
the  History  of  Medical  Science  and  Medical  Service,  1524-1960,  vol.  II,  ed.  Dorothy 
Long  (Raleigh,  N.  C:  The  North  Carolina  Medical  Society,  1972),  593. 

12.  Quoted  in  Allen  Tullos,  "The  Great  Hookworm  Crusade,"  Southern  Exposure  6 
(1978):  41;  James  Leloudis,  "'A  More  Certain  Means  of  Grace':  Pedagogy,  Self, 
and  Society  in  North  Carolina,  1880-1920"  (Ph.D.  diss.,  University  of  North 
Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  1989),  293-300.  Also  see  John  Ettling,  The  Germ  of 
Laziness:  Rockefeller  Philanthropy  and  Public  Health  in  the  New  South  (Cambridge: 
Harvard  University  Press,  1981)  for  an  analysis  of  the  hookworm  campaign. 

13.  Washburn,  History  of  N.  C.  Board  of  Health,  46-9. 

14.  Washburn,  History  of  N.  C.  Board  of  Health,  48. 

15.  Fee,  Disease  and  Discovers,  28. 


16.  Steven  C.  Wheatley,  The  Politics  of  Philanthropy:  Abraham  Flexr\er  and  Medical 
Education  (Madison:  The  University  of  Wisconsin  Press,  1988),  57-107;  Fee, 
Disease  and  Discovery,  29-30. 

17.  Fee,  Disease  and  Discovery,  37-40. 

18.  B.  E.  Washburn,  As  /  Recall:  The  Hookworm  Campaigns  Initiated  by  the  Rocke- 
feller Sanitary  Commission  and  the  Rockefeller  Foundation  in  the  Southern  United 
States  and  Tropical  America  (New  York:  The  Rockefeller  Foundation,  1960),  15, 
111-181. 

19.  B.  E.  Washburn,  "Report  on  Proposed  Cooperation  for  Training  Public  Health 
Workers  Between  the  State  Board  of  Health  and  the  University  of  North 
Carolina,"  [1919],  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health  Records,  Division  of 
Archives  and  History,  Raleigh,  North  Carolina  (hereafter  cited  as  NCSBH); 
"Tentative  Report  from  the  North  Carolina  Board  of  Health  to  the  University 
of  North  Carolina  Regarding  the  Establishment  of  a  Post  Graduate  Course  of 
Study  for  Health  Officers  and  Public  Health  Nurses,"  March  17,  1919,  Univer- 
sity Papers,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives,  University  of  North 
Carolina,  Chapel  Hill  (hereafter  cited  as  University  Papers). 

20.  H.  W  Chase  to  W.  P  Jacocks,  April  30,  1919,  University  Papers. 

21.  Washburn,  History  of  hi.  C.  Board  of  Health,  53;  Washburn,  "Report  on  Proposed 
Cooperation  for  Training  Public  Health  Workers  Between  the  State  Board  of 
Health  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina"  and  William  deB.  MacNider  to 
H.  W  Chase,  November  7,  1919,  University  Papers. 

22.  Washburn,  History  of  N.  C.  Board  of  Health,  72-3. 

23.  Bidletin  of  the  'North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health  37  (January  1922):  3-11. 

24.  Biennial  Report,  North  Carolina  Board  of  Health  (1936-38)  (Raleigh,  N.  C: 
North  Carolina  Board  of  Health,  1938),  22-25. 

25.  Report  on  a  Survey  of  the  Organization  and  Administration  of  the  State  Government 
of  North  Carolina  (Washington:  The  Brookings  Institution,  1930),  iv,  176-90. 

26.  Biennia;  Report  (1936-38),  25-29. 

27.  James  M.  Parrott  to  John  A.  Ferrell,  July  16,  1931;  John  A  Ferrell  to  James  M. 
Parrott,  July  20,  1931;  James  M.  Parrott  to  John  A.  Ferrell,  July  24,  1931;  John 
A.  Ferrell  to  James  M.  Parrott,  July  28,  1931,  Record  Group  2,  Series  236, 
Rockefeller  Foundation  Archives  of  the  Rockefeller  Archive  Center,  Pocantico 
Hills,  North  Tarrytown,  New  York  (hereafter  cited  as  RFA). 

28.  H.  G.  Baity  to  Frank  P.  Graham,  February  1,  1932,  Office  of  the  President 
Records,  Frank  Porter  Graham  Series,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives, 
University  of  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill  (hereafter  cited  as  Graham  Series). 

29.  Memorandum  by  John  A.  Ferrell,  March  24,  1932,  RG  2,  Ser.  236,  RFA. 

30.  Daniel  Singal,  The  War  Within:  From  Victorian  to  Modernist  Thought  in  the 
South,  1919-1945  (Chapel  Hill:  University  of  North  Carolina  Press,  1982), 
115-152,  265-301. 

31.  Albert  Coates,  The  Story  of  the  Institute  of  Goiemment:  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill  (Chapel  Hill:  n.p.,  1981),  27-8. 

32.  Howard  W  Odum  to  Frank  Graham,  May  21,  1931;  W  C.  Jackson  to  Frank  P. 
Graham,  January  8,  1934,  Graham  Series. 


182 


ii.  Carl  V.  Reynolds  to  Charles  S.  Mangum,  July  10,  1935,  "Plan  for  Educational 
Unit  in  the  Field  of  Public  Health  in  the  University  of  North  Carolina, 
School  of  Medicine";  C.  S.  Mangum  to  M.  V.  Ziegler,  March  18,  1935, 
NCSBH. 

34.  Committee  on  Economic  Security,  Report  to  the  President  of  the  Committee  on 
Economic  Security  (Washington:  United  States  Government  Printing  Office, 
1935),  38-41. 

35.  Edwin  E.  Witte,  The  Development  of  the  Social  Security  Act  (Madison,  Wisconsin: 
The  University  of  Wisconsin  Press,  1963),  171-2;  Roy  Lubove,  "The  New  Deal 
and  National  Health,"  Current  History  45  Ouly  1963):  83. 

36.  Memorandum  by  M.  V.  Ziegler,  December  27,  1935,  Office  of  the  Chancellor: 
R.  B.  House  Series,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives,  University  of 
North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill  (hereafter  cited  as  House  Series). 


1.  Frank  P.  Graham  to  Milton  J.  Rosenau,  December  30,  1935,  Graham  Series; 
"State  Is  Slated  to  Get  Regional  Health  School,"  hlews  and  Observer,  January  7, 
1936;  Matthew  S.  Broun  to  Frank  P.  Graham,  January  22,  1936,  Graham 
Series.  See  also  C.  C.  Hudson  to  Milton  J.  Rosenau,  January  16,  1936,  SPH. 

2.  C.  S.  Mangum  to  Frank  P.  Graham,  February  5,  1936,  Graham  Series;  "Rosenau 
on  Epidemics,"  The  Chapel  hlill  Weekly,  February  14,  1936;  "Rosenau  Speaks 
on  Epidemiology,"  The  Daily  Tarheel,  February  6,  1936. 

3.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  R.  B.  House,  December  18,  1936,  House  Series. 

4.  Jean  Alonzo  Curran,  Founders  of  the  Harvard  School  of  Public  Health,  with  Bio- 
graphical >^otes,  1909-1946  (New  York:  Josiah  Macy,  Jr.  Foundation,  1970),  28; 
Fee,  Disease  and  Discovery,  88-9. 

5.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  C.  S.  Mangum,  April  28,  1936,  SPH. 

6.  Charles  M.  Weiss,  "An  Historical  Outline  of  the  Department  of  Environmental 
Sciences  and  Engineering,"  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1967,  mime- 
ographed), 1. 

7.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  Frank  P.  Graham,  June  6,  1936,  Graham  Series;  Albert 
Coates,  "A  Portrait  in  Words,"  in  Presentation  of  the  Herman  G.  Bait7  Portrait  to 
the  University  of  hlorth  Carolina  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  [1966]), 
7-9. 

8.  A.  Worth  Petty,  interview  with  author,  Virginia  Beach,  Va.,  November  10, 

9.  Petty  interview. 

10.  Petty  interview;  Minutes  of  Administrative  Board  of  the  Division  of  Public 
Health,  November  13,  1936,  SPH. 

11.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  Charles  S.  Mangum,  September  12,  1936,  SPH;  Frank  P. 
Graham  to  Charles  S.  Mangum,  June  18,  1936,  SPH;  Frank  P.  Graham  to 
Charles  S.  Mangum,  W.  deB.  MacNider,  M.  J.  Rosenau,  Herman  G.  Baity, 
and  W.  R.  Berryhill,  March  22,  1937,  SPH. 


183 


12.  "University  of  North  Carolina  Public  Health  and  Medical  School  Project," 
March,  1937,  SPH, 

13.  H.  G.  Baity  to  Raymond  J.  Rosenberger,  June  12,  1937;  H.  G.  Baity  to  Milton 
J.  Rosenau,  June  25,  1937,  SPH. 

14.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  R.  B.  House,  March  3,  1938;  R.  B.  House  to  M.  J.  Rosenau, 
March  7,  1938,  SPH. 

15.  John  Larsh,  interview  with  author,  Edenton,  N.  C,  October  3,  1988;  M.  j. 
Rosenau  to  A.  S.  Rose,  October  27,  1937,  SPH. 

16.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  My  Friends,  September  25,  1939,  SPH;  memorandum  by 
William  A.  Mcintosh,  December  4,  1939,  RG  2.1,  RFA. 

17.  Emil  Chanlett,  interview  with  author,  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  October  26,  1988; 
Thomas  J.  Brooks,  Jr.,  "Reflections,"  The  Body  Politic  4  (Summer  1976):  3. 

18.  Fee,  Disease  and  Discovery,  42;  Record  of  Faculty  Meeting,  February  10,  1940, 
SPH;  R.  B.  House  to  M.  J.  Rosenau,  June  15,  1940,  Graham  Series. 

19.  Allan  Brandt,  No  Magic  Bullet:  A  Social  History  of  Venereal  Disease  in  the 
United  States  Since  1880  (New  York:  Oxford  University  Press,  1985),  6. 

20.  Bryan  Haislip,  A  History  of  the  Z.  Smith  Reynolds  Foundation  (Winston-Salem, 
N.  C:  John  F  Blair,  Publisher,  1967),  n.p.;  "Enormous  Sum  is  Given  State  for 
Battle  Against  Syphilis,"  hJews  and  Observer,  December  19,  1937. 

21.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  R.  B.  House,  October  3,  1939;  J.  E.  Moore  to  Wm.  deB. 
MacNider,  June  19,  1939,  SPH. 

22.  "A  Study  in  the  Epidemiology  of  Syphilis,  Orange,  Person,  Chatham  Counties, 
North  Carolina,"  July  1,  1940,  to  December  31,  1940,  n.d.,  3;  "Summary  of  the 
Activities  of  the  Field  Epidemiological  Study  of  Syphilis  in  the  Orange- 
Chatham-Person  Health  District  and  the  City  of  Durham  and  Durham 
County  During  the  Year  1942,"  n.d.,  SPH. 

23.  E.  A.  Kelley,  Bessie  Baker,  Ruth  Council,  and  Bessie  M.  Chapman  to  Frank  P. 
Graham,  August  23,  1937;  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  R.  B.  House,  December  6,  1937; 
Record  of  Faculty  Meeting,  December  9,  1939;  Carl  V.  Reynolds  to  M.  V. 
Ziegler,  April  17,  1940,  SPH. 

24.  M,  J.  Rosenau  to  R.  B.  House,  November  18,  1940,  SPH. 

25.  Ruth  W.  Hay  to  M.  J.  Rosenau,  September  11,  1940,  SPH. 

26.  Harriet  H.  Barr  and  Helen  Hanken,  comps..  Health  Education:  Selected  Papers 
of  Lucy  Morgan  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1986),  ix-xii. 

27.  Lucy  S.  Morgan,  interview  with  author,  Asheville,  N.  C,  December  19,  1988; 
Lucy  S.  Morgan,  "Health  Education  in  Extra-Cantonment  Zones,"  in  Health 
Education,  Barr  and  Hanken,  10-13. 

28.  H.  W.  Brown  to  R.  B.  House,  August  25,  1942,  SPH. 

29.  Eunice  N.  Tyler  and  Lucy  S.  Morgan,  eds..  Health  Educators  at  Work,  Special 
Issue  (May  1966):  41. 

30.  Morgan  interview. 

31.  H.  W.  Brown  to  R.  B.  House,  August  31,  1942,  SPH. 

32.  Harold  B.  Gotaas,  "Cooperative  Health  and  Sanitation  in  the  Americas," 
School  of  Public  Health  News  1  (Summer  1946):  3. 


184 


CHAPTER  3 


1.  M,  J.  Rosenau  to  W.  K.  Sharp,  September  7,  1945,  SPH. 

2.  Shepard  is  quoted  in  Ida  Jenkins  Gadsden,  "The  Historical  Development  and 
Social  Implications  of  the  Public  Health  Education  Program  at  North  Carolina 
College  at  Durham"  (Ph.D.  diss..  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill, 
1968),  66.  The  most  complete  history  of  the  program  is  Gadsden's.  See  also  B. 
T  McMillon,  "North  Carolina  College  Makes  Health  Training  Functional," 
The  High  School  ]oumal  32  (1949):  217-219;  Tyler  and  Morgan,  Health  Educators 
at  Work,  Special  Issue,  59-62. 

3.  Morgan  interview,  Larsh  interview. 

4.  Dorothy  M.  Talbot,  "A  History  of  the  Public  Health  Nursing  Program  in  the 
School  of  Public  Health,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,"  (type- 
script in  author's  possession),  18-20. 

5.  Memorandum  by  E.  W.  McHenry,  March  8,  1946,  General  Education  Board 
records.  Series  1,  Subseries  3,  Box  539,  Folder  5769,  Rockefeller  Archive  Center. 

6.  Edward  H.  Beardsley,  A  History  of  hleglect:  Health  Care  for  Blacks  and  Mill 
Workers  in  the  Twentieth-Century  South  (Knoxville:  The  University  of  Tennessee 
Press,  1987),  273-309. 

7.  Larsh  interview. 

8.  Morgan  interview.  See  Gadsden,  "The  Public  Health  Education  Program  at 
North  Carolina  College  at  Durham,"  12. 

9.  Rosemary  M.  Kent,  "The  Moment  Between  the  Past  and  the  Future,"  (type- 
script in  author's  possession),  25-6. 

10.  James  S.  Simmons  to  Frank  P.  Graham,  January  24,  1946,  SPH. 

11.  M.  J.  Rosenau  to  A.  R.  Mann,  November  8,  1945,  House  Series. 

12.  "A.  H.  Bryan  Heads  New  Department  of  Nutrition,"  School  of  Public  Health 
News  2  (Winter  1946):  1. 

13.  H.  G.  Baity  to  R.  B.  House,  May  15,  1946,  SPH. 

14.  H.  G.  Baity  to  E.  G.  McGavran,  March  1,  1947,  Personnel  File,  Dean's  Office, 
School  of  Public  Health,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill  (here- 
after cited  as  Personnel  File). 

15.  Harriet  H.  Barr  and  Frances  H.  Barrie,  Edward  G.  McGavran:  Guardian  of  the 
Body  Politic  (Chapel  Hill:  The  School  of  Public  Health,  1979),  7-16. 

16.  E.  G.  McGavran,  Report  to  the  Eaculty  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health, 
1963),  n.p. 

17.  "Proposed  Field  Training  Program  of  the  School  of  Public  Health,"  n.d.;  M.  R. 
Kinde  to  E.  G.  McGavran,  May  21,  1948,  SPH. 

18.  "W.  P.  Richardson  Heads  New  Department,"  School  of  Public  Health  News  3 
(Summer  1948):   1. 

19.  Harold  J.  Magnuson  to  E.  G.  McGavran,  February  7,  1950,  SPH;  "Syphilis 
Experimental  Laboratory,"  School  of  Public  Health  News  4  (Summer  1949): 
1-2. 


20.  Edward  G.  McGavran  to  R.  B.  House,  July  30,  1948,  SPH. 

21.  Barr  and  Barrie,  Guardian  of  the  Body  Politic,  26-7. 

22.  Paul  F.  Whitaker  and  Frederick  C.  Hubbard,  "The  History  of  the  North 
Carolina  Medical  Care  Commission,"  in  Essays  in  the  History  of  Medical  Science 
and  Medical  Service,  1524-1960,  vol.  I,  ed.  Dorothy  Long  (Raleigh,  N.  C:  The 
North  Carolina  Medical  Society,  1972),  330-49.  For  a  discussion  of  this  process 
on  a  national  and  international  level  see  Daniel  M.  Fox,  Health  Policies, 
Health  Politics:  The  British  and  American  Experience,  1911-1965  (Princeton,  New 
Jersey:  Princeton  University  Press,  1986),  115-131,  149-168. 

23.  For  McGavran's  views  on  the  Division  of  Health  Affairs  at  the  time  of  his 
retirement,  see  E.  G.  McGavran  to  William  Aycock,  June  4,  1963,  Office  of 
the  Chancellor:  W.  B.  Aycock  Series,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives, 
University  of  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill. 

24.  For  a  discussion  of  national  postwar  health  policy  see  Starr,  American  Medicine, 
347-363. 

25.  Fox,  Health  Policies,  153-8. 

26.  Edward  G.  McGavran  to  R.  B.  House,  July  30,  1948,  SPH. 

27.  H.  E.  Handley,  Visit  to  the  University  of  North  Carolina  School  of  Public 
Health,  December  1-2,  1949,  n.d.,  Commonwealth  Fund  records.  Rockefeller 
Archive  Center,  p.  2. 

28.  Cecil  Sheps,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  November  4,  1988. 

29.  John  J.  Wright  to  Lowell  J.  Reed,  December  19,  1945,  SPH. 

30.  Report  of  Activities  of  the  Department  of  Maternal  and  Child  Health  in  the 
School  of  Public  Health  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina,  Under  a  Joint 
Project  with  the  North  Carolina  State  Board  of  Health  and  Sponsored  by  the 
Children's  Bureau,  n.d.,  SPH. 

31.  "Department  of  Mental  Health,"  in  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report, 
1951-52  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1952),  1-3. 

32.  Rebecca  Broach  Bryan,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  March  18, 
1989. 

33.  Frances  Gust,  interview  with  author,  North  Myrtle  Beach,  S.  C,  June  21,  1989. 

34.  Geraldine  Gourley,  interview  with  author,  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  August  31,  1989. 

35.  Gourley  interview. 

36.  "Toward  New  Horizons,"  The  High  School  Journal  30  (May  1947):  113. 

37.  Harcourt  Morgan's  philosophy  is  best  expressed  in  Ellis  F.  Hartford,  Our 
Common  Mooring  (Athens:  The  University  of  Georgia  Press,  1941). 

38.  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1951-1952  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public 
Health,  1952),  11,  14. 

39.  Edward  G.  McGavran,  "What  Is  Public  Health?",  Canadian  Journal  of  Public 
Health  44  (December,  1953):  441-451. 

40.  Ibid.,  445-7. 

41.  Memorandum  by  Dean  McGavran  to  Faculty,  December  9,  1952,  SPH. 


186 


CHAPTER  4 

1.  Starr,  American  Medicine  347. 

2.  Daniel  Okun,  interview  with  author,  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  September  23,  1988. 

3.  Department  of  Sanitary  Engineering,  Sanitary  Engineering  in  Peru  (Chapel  Hill: 
School  of  Public  Health,  n.d.),  19;  "UNC  School  of  Public  Health  in  Peru," 
The  Body  Politic  3  (May  1957):  1. 

4.  Department  of  Sanitary  Engineering,  Sanitary  Engineering  in  Peru,  20. 

5.  Lucy  S.  Morgan  and  Hiawatha  B.  Walker,  "A  University's  Focus  on  Indian 
Health,"  Health  Educators  at  Work  11  Qune  1960):  l-Il. 

6.  Joe  Fred  Sills  and  Gilbert  Trujillo,  "Zuni  — Center  of  the  World  — Reaches  Out," 
Health  Educators  at  Work  II  Qune  I960):  25-32. 

7.  Starr,  American  Medicine,  343. 

8.  Goulson  interview;  Bryan  interview. 

9.  Department  of  Biostatistics,  "Report  for  the  Year,  July  I,  1951-June  30,  1952," 
in  Annual  Report,  1951-1952,  4. 

10.  Ibid. 

11.  Tyler  and  Morgan,  Health  Educators  at  Work,  Special  Issue,  30;  McGavran, 
Report  to  the  Faatlty,  n.p. 

12.  Gourley  interview. 

13.  Department  of  Epidemiology,  "Annual  Report,  1953-54,"  in  School  of  Public 
Health  Annual  Report,  1953-1954  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1954),  3. 

14.  John  Cassel  to  E.  G.  McGavran,  October  I,  1958,  Personnel  File. 

15.  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1958-1959  (Chapel  Hill,  School  of 
Public  Health,  1959),  n.p. 

16.  E.  G.  McGavran  to  Sidney  L.  Kark,  June  29,  I960,  Personnel  File. 

17.  Michel  Ibrahim,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  June  6,  1989. 

18.  Roger  W.  Howell  to  Edward  G.  McGavran,  September  20,  1956,  Personnel  File. 

19.  The  Ruth  W.  Hay  Portrait  Committee  to  E.  G.  McGavran,  August  9,  1954, 
Personnel  File. 

20.  Margaret  B.  Dolan,  Curriculum  Vitae,  Personnel  File. 

21.  Bryan  interview. 

22.  Hilton  Goulson,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  July  12,  1989; 
Larsh  interview. 

23.  Goulson  interview;  Larsh  interview. 

24.  Larsh  interview. 

25.  Larsh  interview. 

26.  Okun  interview. 

27.  McGavran,  Report  to  t/ie  Faculty,  n.p.;  Okun  interview. 

28.  "Construction  to  Start  on  New  P  H.  Building,"  The  Body  Politic  5  (May  1959):  5. 

29.  The  letter  included  an  editorial  in  support  of  the  bond  vote  from  The  Chapel 
Hill  Weekly,  October  5,  1959,  detailing  the  school's  inadequate  facilities. 


187 


30.  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1959-1960  (Chapel  Hill,  School  of  Public 
Health,  1960),  5. 

31.  E.  G.  McGavran,  "Testimony  Before  the  Committee  on  Interstate  and  Foreign 
Commerce  Relative  to  the  Proposed  Bill  H.R.  4998  (S.  1071)  for  Community 
Health  Facilities  and  Services,"  May  4,  1961,  SPH. 

32.  Rosemary  Kent,  This  Moment  Between  the  Past  and  the  Future  (Chapel  Hill: 
School  of  Public  Health,  n.d.),  n.p. 

33.  School  of  Public  Health,  "Self-Study  Report,"  January  15,  1963,  SPH,  v-6. 

34.  Ibid.,  x-2. 

35.  McGavran,  Report  to  the  Faculty,  n.p. 

36.  Goulson  interview. 

37.  Past,  Present,  and  Future  of  Schools  of  Public  Health  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of 
Public  Health,  1963). 


1.  Starr,  American  Medicine,  367. 

2.  John  E.  Larsh,  Jr.,  to  Henry  T.  Clark,  May  22,  1963,  Vice  Chancellor  for 
Health  Affairs,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives,  University  of  North 
Carolina,  Chapel  Hill. 

3.  W.  Fred  Mayes,  Curriculum  Vitae,  Personnel  File. 

4.  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1961-1962  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public 
Health,  1962),  4;  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1972-1973  (Chapel 
Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1973),  21. 

5.  Weiss,  "Historical  Outline,"  4. 

6.  Daniel  A.  Okun,  "The  History  of  the  Institute  for  Environmental  Studies," 
mimeograph,  June,  1977,  SPH. 

7.  ESE  Notes  3  (April  1966):  1;  ESE  Notes  4  Qanuary  1967):  1;  ESE  Notes  6  Quly 
1969):  1. 

8.  "Department  of  Biostatistics,  UNC,"  mimeograph,  November,  1974,  SPH. 

9.  "Department  of  Biostatistics,"  in  School  of  Public  Health,  Annual  Report,  1966-1967 
(Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1967),  6,  29. 

10.  A  Guide  to  the  Carolina  Population  Center  and  its  Affiliated  Programs  (Chapel 
Hill:  Carolina  Population  Center,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel 
Hill,  1975). 

11.  Bernard  Greenberg,  "Memorial  Speech  for  Dr.  John  C.  Cassel,"  October  31, 
1976,  SPH. 

12.  John  C.  Cassel,  "Summary  of  Major  Findings  of  the  Evans  County  Cardio- 
vascular Studies,"  Archives  of  Internal  Medicine  128  (December  1971):  881-9. 

13.  Greenberg,  "Memorial  Speech  for  Dr.  John  C.  Cassel." 

14.  Larsh  interview;  Goulson  interview. 

15.  Okun  interview. 


188 


16.  Okun  interview. 

17.  William  Herzog,  interview  with  author,  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  July  13,  1989. 

18.  Starr,  American  Medicine,  370. 

19.  W.  Fred  Mayes,  "Personal  Introduction -A  Statement  of  Intentions  and  E.xpec- 
tations,"  September  17,  1963,  SPH. 

20.  In  1967,  the  school  also  established  an  administrative  board  to  comply  with 
university  policy,  and  the  next  year  adopted  a  written  constitution  and  bylaws. 

21.  Robert  B.  Moorhead,  "Formal  Goal  Formulation  in  a  School  of  Public  Health" 
(M.P.A.  thesis.  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  1972),  86. 

22.  Morgan  interview. 

23.  J.  Carlyle  Sitterson  to  W.  Fred  Mayes,  June  7,  1966;  W.  Fred  Mayes  to  J. 
Carlyle  Sitterson,  June  22,  1966,  Office  of  the  Chancellor:  J.  C.  Sitterson 
Series,  University  of  North  Carolina  Archives,  University  of  North  Carolina, 
Chapel  Hill. 

24.  Elizabeth  Lovell  McMahan,  "A  Study  of  the  Department  of  Public  Health 
Education,  School  of  Public  Health,  University  of  North  Carolina"  (Ph.D. 
diss.,  Duke  University,  1968),  269-82. 

25.  Memorandum  by  William  Fred  Mayes,  January  3,  1969,  SPH;  Guy  W.  Steuart 
to  Dean  Mayes,  August  24,  1971;  Hiawatha  B.  Walker  to  Guy  W.  Steuart, 
July  30,  1971,  SPH. 

26.  Herzog  interview;  Sagar  Jain,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  Sep- 
tember 8,  1989. 

27.  Department  of  Public  Health  Administration,  "Annual  Report,  1966-67,"  in 
School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  J 966-67  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public 
Health,  1967),  1-2. 

28.  Goulson  interview. 

29.  Talbot,  "History  of  Public  Health  Nursing,"  32-4. 

30.  Ibid.,  37-41. 

31.  Margaret  Dolan  to  Charles  Harper,  August  24,  1966,  Personnel  File;  Talbot, 
"History  of  Public  Health  Nursing,"  45-7. 

32.  Weiss,  "Historical  Outline,"  7. 

33.  John  C.  Cassel  to  Fred  Mayes,  November  5,  1964,  SPH. 

34.  Gourley  interview. 

35.  William  Fred  Mayes,  The  University  oj  hlorth  Carolina  School  of  Public  Health 
Relates  to  the  hleeds  of  a  Changing  Society:  A  Selective  and  Interpretive  Account 
with  Emphasis  on  the  Decade  of  the  Sixties  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public 
Health,  1975),  53-4. 

36.  The  SPH  could  look  proudly  at  its  own  record  in  the  black  community  and 
with  black  students.  W.  Fred  Mayes  to  J.  Carlyle  Sitterson,  February  24,  1969, 
SPH. 

37.  Gourley  interview. 

38.  Herzog  interview. 

39.  "Report  of  Temporary  Committee  on  Student  Organization  of  School  of  Public 
Health,"  n.d.,  SPH. 


189 


40.  Jane  Mathews,  "Convocation  Message,"  September  16,  1970,  SPH. 

41.  PUBH  Students  to  W.  Fred  Mayes,  February  9,  1970,  SPH. 

42.  School  of  Public  Health  "Self-Study  Summary  Report,"  (Chapel  Hill,  School  of 
Public  Health,  1975,  Mimeographed),  372. 

43.  Herzog  interview. 

44.  Herzog  interview. 

45.  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  "Report  of  Chancellor's  Study 
Commission  on  the  Role  of  the  School  of  Public  Health,"  (Chapel  Hill: 
University  of  North  Carolina,  1971,  Mimeographed),  7-14. 

46.  Ibid.,  4. 

47.  Ibid.,  63. 

CHAPTER  6 

1.  Starr,  American  Medicine,  380. 

2.  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1969-1970  (Chapel  Hill,  School  of  Public 
Health,  1970),  n.p.;  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1979-1980  (Chapel 
Hill,  School  of  Public  Health,  1980),  17,26,45. 

3.  "A  Statement  of  Concerns  Regarding  the  Relevance  &  Responsiveness  of  the 
School  of  Public  Health  to  the  Needs  of  Black  Americans,"  [1971],  SPH. 

4.  William  T.  Small,  interview  with  author.  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C,  August  24,  1989. 

5.  Small  interview. 

6.  Small  interview. 

7.  Small  interview;  Minority  Student  Group  to  B.  G.  Greenberg,  November  6, 
1972,  SPH. 

8.  John  E.  Larsh  to  Dorothea  C.  Leighton,  June  15,  1972;  Joseph  C.  Edozien  to 
Dorothea  C.  Leighton,  September  29,  1972,  SPH.  For  an  overview  of  the 
faculty's  response  to  the  report  see  Cecil  G.  Sheps,  "The  University  of  North 
Carolina  School  of  Public  Health,"  in  Schools  of  Public  Health:  Present  and 
Future,  eds.,  John  Z.  Bowers  and  Elizabeth  F.  Purcell  (New  York;  Josiah  Macy, 
Jr.  Foundation,  1974),  72-8. 

9.  Roy  R.  Kuebler  to  Emil  T.  Chanlett,  January  10,  1972,  SPH. 

10.  School  of  Public  Health,  "Self-Study  Summary  Report,"  358-63. 

11.  Harriet  H.  Barr,  Curriculum  Vitae,  Personnel  File. 

12.  "Alumni  Association,"  The  Body  Politic  1  Ganuary  1973):  19;  "A  First:  SPH 
Alumni  Day  1973,"  The  Body  Politic  1  Oune  1973):  1;  "Darity  Heads  Alumni 
Association,"  The  Body  Politic  2  (August  1974):  1. 

13.  Charles  L.  Harper,  "An  Outreach  Approach  to  Service,"  The  Body  Politic  6 
Oune  1979):  5. 

14.  "Highlighting  Continuing  Education,"  The  Body  Politic  1  (June  1973):  5;  John 
Hughes,  Curriculum  Vitae,  Personnel  File. 

15.  Janice  Westaby  directed  the  program  from  1969  to  1973,  Lydia  HoUey  from 
1973  to  1974,  and  Bill  Herzog  until  1982. 


190 


16.  Gust  interview;  "Bachelors  Program  Initiated  in  Public  Health"  The  Body 

Politic  4  (October  1976):  16. 
17-  Dr.  Cecil  Slome  and  Howard  Barnhill  coordinated  the  program  initially.  "Area 

Health  Education  Centers  Established,"  The  Body  Politic  1  (June  1973):  11. 

18.  "Dean  Discusses  School's  Future,"  The  Body  Politic  1  (June  1973):  1. 

19.  Okun  interview. 

20.  Cecil  G.  Sheps,  Higher  Education  for  Public  Health:  A  Report  of  the  Milbank 
Memorial  Fund  Commission  (New  York:  Prodist,  1976),  211. 

21.  Ibid.,  153. 

22.  B.  G.  Greenberg,  "The  Crisis  in  the  Schools  of  Public  Health:  The  Response," 
The  Body  Politic  2  (August  1974):  11. 

23.  Jain  interview. 

24.  Jain  interview;  "A  Conversation  with  Sagar  Jain,"  The  Body  Politic  6  (January 
1979):  1. 

25.  "Morris  Heads  Maternal  and  Child  Health,"  The  Body  Politic  3  (November 
1975):  4;  Naomi  M.  Morris,  "Child  Advocacy  a  Major  Role  for  MCH,"  The 
Body  Politic  4  (October  1976):  1. 

26.  C.  Arden  Miller,  Curriculum  Vitae,  Personnel  File. 

27.  Memorandum  by  Review  Committee  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Department  of 
Nutrition,  April  9,  1976,  SPH. 

28.  "Medical  Evaluation  of  Federal  Program  Completed,"  The  Body  Politic  4  (October 
1976):  4. 

29.  "Project  Established  to  Improve  Maternal  Nutrition,"  The  Body  Politic  9  (February 
1982):   1. 

30.  "Rural  Environmental  Education  Project  End,"  The  Body  Politic  7  (January, 
1980),  10. 

31.  "Program  Begun  to  Strengthen  Health  Education  in  Cameroon,"  The  Body 
Politic  6  (September  1978):  8. 

32.  A  1975  survey  of  the  deans  of  the  schools  of  public  health  ranked  the  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina  second  overall.  Epidemiology,  environmental  sciences 
and  engineering,  biostatistics,  and  parasitology  and  laboratory  practice,  how- 
ever, ranked  as  the  best  in  the  nation.  "SPH  Ranked  Second,"  The  Body  Politic 
3  (March  1975):  2;  "New  Contract  Awarded  Lipids  Center,"  The  Body  Politic  7 
(October  1979):  6. 

33.  Val  Lauder,  "Re:  The  Russians,"  The  Body  Politic  4  (Summer  1976):  4. 

34.  Russell  E  Christman,  "ESE  Looks  Ahead,"  The  Body  Politic  3  Oune  1975):  1. 

35.  "School  Participates  in  Rubber  Industry  Research,"  TKe  Body  Politic  1  Qune 
1973):  6.  Dr.  Robert  Lee  Harris,  Jr.,  the  former  director  of  the  Bureau  of 
Abatement  and  Control,  of  the  National  Air  Pollution  Control  Administra- 
tion, took  over  as  director  of  the  Occupational  Health  Studies  Group  in 
1975.  The  group  continued  its  arrangements  with  the  rubber  industry  until 
the  early  1980s,  when  it  began  investigating  similar  problems  in  other  indus- 
tries. See  School  of  Public  Health  Annual  Report,  1975-76  (Chapel  Hill:  School 
of  Public  Health,  1976),  21. 


191 


36.  "Hypertension  in  Rural  Communities  Studied,"  The  Body  Politic  7  (October 
1979):  7. 

37.  Annua;  Repon,  1975-76  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1976),  27. 

38.  Small  interview;  Self-Study  Report,  1981  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health, 
1981),  131;  "American  Indian  Recruitment  Officer  Named,"  The  Body  Politic  7 
Ganuary  1980):  2. 

39.  Small  interview. 


in.  ^  iii        M^JJi^^ 


■nr 


UE 


1.  Institute  of  Medicine,  The  Future  of  Public  Health  (Washington,  D.  C:  National 
Academy  Press,  1988),  19. 

2.  Annual  Report,  1978-79  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1979),  21,  29,  47; 
Annual  Report,  1988-89  (Chapel  Hill:  School  of  Public  Health,  1989),  2-17. 

3.  The  Body  Politic  8  (November  1980):  1. 

4.  Ibrahim  interview. 

5.  Ibid. 

6.  Ibid. 

7.  The  Body  Politic  12  Qune  1985):  4. 

8.  Memorandum  by  Strategic  Planning  Committee,  January  18,  1989,  SPH. 


192 


STATE  LIBRARY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 


3  3091  00747  4927 


^ 


p 


REVENTIVE  medicine  dreams  of  a  time 
when  there  shall  be  enough  for  all,  and 
every  man  shall  bear  his  share  of  labor  in 
accordance  with  his  ability,  and  every  man  shall 
possess  sufficient  for  the  needs  of  his  body  and  the 
demands  of  health.  These  things  he  shall  have 

as  a  matter  of  justice  and  not  of  charity. 

Preventive  medicine  dreams  of  a  time  when 
there  shall  be  no  unnecessary  suffering  and  no  pre- 
mature deaths;  when  the  welfare  of  the  people  shall 
be  our  highest  concern;  when  humanity  and  mercy 
shall  replace  greed  and  selfishness;  and  it  dreams  that 
all  these  things  will  be  accomplished  through  the 
wisdom  of  man.  Preventive  medicine  dreams 

of  these  things,  not  with  the  hope  that  we,  individ- 
ually, may  participate  in  them,  but  with  the  joy  that 
we  may  aid  in  their  coming  to  those  who  shall  live 
after  us.  When  young  men  have  vision  the 

dreams  of  old  men  come  true."